JP2020130546A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To reduce a game value granted to a player per unit period.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a first informing performance for suggesting a possibility of becoming an advantageous state of a first kind and then reporting control to an advantageous state of a first kind, and a second informing performance for suggesting a possibility of becoming an advantageous state of a second kind and then reporting control to an advantageous state of a second kind, and can execute a first specific performance that is executed after completion of the first informing performance and is not executed after completion of the second informing performance, and a second specific performance that is executed after completion of the second informing performance and reports control to an advantageous state of a first kind. A backup storage part is provided as one continuous storage area. Writing of new backup data is prohibited when a writing flag is on, and writing processing of backup data corresponding to one condition is not executed when writing processing of backup data corresponding to the other condition is under execution.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-7

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

Conventionally, there has been a game machine in which a jackpot that is advantageous to a player is set to have a longer fanfare period in which a fanfare effect of a jackpot is executed than a jackpot that is disadvantageous (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this way, if the fanfare period is lengthened, the interval between the jackpot and the next jackpot becomes longer, the prize balls given to the player per unit period can be reduced, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be suppressed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-148

However, if the advantageous jackpot fanfare period is simply set longer, the player will see a long fanfare effect for each advantageous jackpot. For this reason, even if it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high, there is a risk that the interest of the game will decline.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to reduce the game value given to a player per unit period and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. It is to provide a game machine.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Compared to the first type of advantageous state (for example, 16R jackpot) and the first type of advantageous state, the expected value of the obtained game value (for example, prize ball) is low (for example, the number of rounds is small, the jackpot). With an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control any of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a second type of advantageous state (for example, a 4R big hit) with a low probability of becoming a big hit later. ,
In an advantageous state, a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a state in which the game medium can be won (for example, an open state), and
A notification effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, an effect from a reach period to an undetermined symbol display) that notifies that the control to an advantageous state is performed.
After the end of the notification effect, in a specific period (for example, a period from a symbol undetermined period to the opening of a large winning opening) until the variable winning means changes to a state in which a game medium can be won, a specific effect ( For example, it is provided with a specific effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect of a symbol undetermined period, an effect of a symbol confirmed period, and an effect of a fanfare period.
The specific period is longer when controlled by the first type of advantageous state than when controlled by the second type of advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, 9). As shown in -7, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the symbol undetermined period is longer than in the case of other jackpots. The reach period, the symbol confirmed period, and the fanfare period may be lengthened.)
The notification effect means
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in an identifiable manner (for example, reaching 7 symbols), it is notified that the control is performed in the first type of advantageous state. (For example, the unconfirmed display of 7 symbols) The first notification effect (for example, the effect from the reach period of FIG. 9-7 (B) to the unconfirmed symbol display, see FIGS. 9-9 (B), (C)). )When,
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in an identifiable manner (for example, even-numbered symbol reach), it is notified that the second type of advantageous state is controlled. (For example, the unconfirmed display of even-numbered symbols) The second notification effect (for example, the effect from the reach period of FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (C) to the unconfirmed symbol display, FIG. 9-8) (B), (C), FIGS. 9-10 (B), (C)) can be executed.
The specific production means
A first specific effect (for example, a pre-fanfare effect similar to the fanfare effect in the symbol undetermined period of FIG. 9-7 (B)) that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect. )When,
It is possible to execute the second specific effect (for example, the promotion success effect of FIG. 9-7 (A)), which is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the first type of advantageous state is controlled. Yes,
The execution period of the first specific effect is longer than that of the second specific effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C)).
further,
A control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic parts (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and a storage content can be retained even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and information on the plurality of electronic parts can be stored. The control means is provided with various storage means (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D), and the control means writes the information to the storage means when the condition for generating an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. Processing (for example, writing processing by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) can be executed, and the storage means corresponds to a storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and the second generation condition. The storage area in which the second information is written is provided as one continuous area (for example, the backup storage unit 41AKA1 including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and the first generation condition and the second generation condition are satisfied. In this case, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on). ..

According to such a configuration, the variable winning means can win the game medium when the first type of advantageous state is controlled as compared with the case where the second type of advantageous state is controlled. By lengthening the period until it is controlled by, it is possible to reduce the game value given to the player per unit period. Further, even when the period until the variable winning means is controlled to be able to win the game medium is lengthened, the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the first specific effect, and the second identification are performed. Since the production is feasible, it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable. Further, when the first type of advantageous state is controlled, the first specific effect having a long execution period is executed, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority. Furthermore, the information can be managed appropriately.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
The specific effect means is executed after the end of the second notification effect, and the third specific effect (for example, the promotion failure effect of FIG. 9-7 (C)) is notified that the second type of advantageous state is controlled. ) Is further feasible.

According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to whether the first type of advantageous state or the second type of advantageous state is reached after the end of the second notification effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. Can be done.

(3) In the game machine of (2) above
The specific effect means notifies that after the end of the second notification effect, the third specific effect is controlled to the second type of advantageous state without executing the third specific effect (for example, FIG. 9-). 4. The effect of notifying that the second type of advantageous state has been confirmed without executing the promotion failure effect shown in the fluctuation patterns PB5-8 and PB5-10 of FIGS. 9-5) can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, when the expected value of the obtained game value becomes the second type advantageous state which is lower than the first type advantageous state, the advantageous state controlled by the execution of the third specific effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player from giving too much expectation that the type of the game may actually be the first type of gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
Further provided with special state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a time saving state) different from the advantageous state,
When the advantageous state control means is controlled to the special state, the advantageous state controlling means controls the advantageous state of the first type at a higher rate than that of the second type (see, for example, FIG. 9-1).

According to such a configuration, in the special state, since the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state of the first type is increased, the ratio of executing the second specific effect is also increased, so that the second specific effect can be obtained. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
When the notification effect means suggests the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in a mode in which it can be specified that the first type of advantageous state is controlled (for example, "7" symbol reach), the second type of the notification effect means. The expectation that the player will be advantageous is higher than the case where it is suggested that the advantageous state is controlled in an identifiable manner (for example, "6" symbol reach). The notification effect is executed (for example, as shown in the fluctuation patterns PB5-5 in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, the jackpot is confirmed in the case of 7 symbol reach, but in the case of other symbol reach, the jackpot is confirmed. The jackpot is not confirmed. In the case of "7" symbol reach, the probability change is confirmed, but in the case of other symbol reach, it may not be the probability change confirmation. If it is not the probability change confirmation, is it promoted to the probability change? Whether or not it may be notified after that.)

According to such a configuration, when it is suggested that the expected value of the obtained game value may be the first type advantageous state, it is often advantageous for the player, so that the first type advantage By suggesting the possibility of becoming a state, the player's expectation can be increased.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Further equipped with a movable member (for example, a movable body 32),
When the first specific effect is executed, the specific effect means is easier to operate the movable member than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5). In the variation pattern PB5-4 and PB5-14, the movable body 32 is operated once, and in the variation pattern PB5-5 of FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, the movable body 32 is operated twice. In addition, only the first movable member may be operated when the second specific effect is executed, and the first movable member and the second movable member may be operated when the first specific effect is executed.)

According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the operation of the movable member.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Further provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, operation detection unit 31) for detecting motion by the player.
When the first specific effect is executed, the specific effect means executes an effect that encourages an action by the player less frequently than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 9-). 4. The fluctuation patterns PB5-4 and PB5-14 of FIGS. 9-5 prompt the continuous striking operation, and the fluctuation patterns PB5-5 of FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5 prompt the operation once).

According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the effect of encouraging the player to move.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
The first specific effect in the first gaming state (for example, high accuracy and high base state) is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, low accuracy and high base state). The execution period is longer than the first specific effect in the low probability low base state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4, 9-5, 9-13), the 16R probability variation jackpot in the low probability high base state. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot in a high accuracy and high base state, the execution period of the promotion effect is lengthened as compared with the case of

According to such a configuration, the first specific effect having a longer execution time than the first specific effect in the second game state is executed in the first game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above
After suggesting the type of advantageous state, in the period until the variable winning means changes to a state in which the game medium can be won, a special suggestion effect suggesting the gaming state after the advantageous state can be executed. With more suggestive production means
The special suggestion effect means
The first special suggestion effect that suggests the transition to the first game state (for example, high accuracy and high base state),
It is possible to execute a second special suggestion effect that suggests a transition to a second gaming state (for example, a low probability high base state, a low probability low base state) that is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the first gaming state. ,
The execution period of the first special suggestion effect is longer than that of the second special suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4, 9-5, 9-7, the transition to the low accuracy and high base state. The execution period of the promotion success effect that suggests the transition to the high accuracy and high base state is longer than the execution period of the promotion failure effect that suggests).

According to such a configuration, the transition to the first gaming state, which is more advantageous for the player than the second gaming state, has a longer execution time than the second special suggestion effect suggesting the transition to the second gaming state. Since the first special suggestion effect suggesting is executed, the player can be given a sense of superiority.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means (10) to (17). Conventionally, information on an abnormality that has occurred is notified in a game machine as shown in JP-A-2016-182314, and when the abnormality is resolved, the information on the abnormality is not saved, so that the defect can be identified and analyzed. There are known gaming machines that can be difficult. It was made in view of the above situation, and the purpose is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately managing information.

(10) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claim of the present application is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901), and can control a plurality of electronic parts. A control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) and a storage means (for example, a backup data memory) that can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped and can store information about the plurality of electronic parts. The control means includes 90210A to 90210D, etc.), and the control means writes the information to the storage means (for example, a memory writing processing unit) when the conditions for generating an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components are satisfied. It is possible to execute (writing processing by 41AKM10, etc.), and the storage means has a storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written. Is provided as one continuous area (for example, backup storage unit 41AKA1 including backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and corresponds to one of the conditions when the first generation condition and the second generation condition are satisfied. While the process of writing the information to be written is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on).
With such a configuration, information can be appropriately managed.

(11) In the game machine of the above (10), the generation condition may be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means (for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc.).
In such a configuration, information can be appropriately managed.

(12) In the gaming machine according to (10) or (11), the first generation condition can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means (for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc.). The second generation condition can be satisfied according to the processing result by the control means (for example, error determination 41AKC3 during effect control), and when the first generation condition is satisfied, the second generation condition is satisfied. The writing process may be executed with priority over the case where the writing process is performed (see, for example, FIG. 16B).
In such a configuration, information can be appropriately managed.

(13) In any of the game machines (10) to (12), when the first generation condition or the second generation condition is satisfied a plurality of times, an execution of a process of writing information corresponding to the previous condition is executed. The process of writing the information corresponding to the next condition may be restricted according to the execution information indicating the inside (for example, the writing flag 41AKF1).
In such a configuration, information can be appropriately managed.

(14) In any of the game machines (10) to (13), the writing process may store the same information in a plurality of storage areas (for example, backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3).
In such a configuration, information can be appropriately managed.

(15) In any of the game machines (10) to (14), the control means is different from the information regarding the plurality of electronic components when a writing condition different from the generation condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute a process of writing related information to the storage means (for example, a backup process according to the setting of the backup control table 120T).
In such a configuration, information can be appropriately managed.

(16) In any of the game machines (10) to (14), an output capable of outputting a control signal for the plurality of electronic components and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means. Means (eg, connectors 90152 to 90155, etc.) may be provided.
In such a configuration, information can be appropriately managed.

(17) In any of the game machines (10) to (16), a first output means (for example, connectors 90152 to 90155) capable of outputting control signals for the plurality of electronic components, and the first output means. However, a second output means (for example, a connector 90156) capable of outputting a read signal according to the stored information of the storage means may be provided.
In such a configuration, information can be appropriately managed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in an embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the special figure display result and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a figure which shows the fanfare time table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process after opening a big hit. It is a figure which shows the ending time table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fanfare effect execution process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a fanfare production. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the flow of a fanfare production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in a round. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect selection 1st process and 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the round post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing after the end of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect execution process. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the flow of selection of the type of an ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of an ending effect. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the flow of an ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the ending effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the special figure display result and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern at the time of low probability low base. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern at the time of high accuracy and high base. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern at the time of low accuracy and high base. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process, and the example of the effect process during variable display. It is a 1st timing chart which shows an example of the effect from the fluctuation display to the start of the 1st round of a big hit. It is a 1st screen transition diagram which shows the flow of the effect from the variation display to the start of the 1st round of a big hit. It is a second screen transition diagram which shows the flow of the effect from the variation display to the start of the first round of a big hit. It is a 3rd screen transition diagram which shows the flow of the effect from the variation display to the start of the 1st round of a big hit. It is a second timing chart which shows an example of the effect from the fluctuation display to the start of the first round of a big hit. It is a 4th screen transition diagram which shows the flow of the effect from the variation display to the start of the 1st round of a big hit. It is a 3rd timing chart which shows an example of the effect from the variable display to the start of the 1st round of a big hit. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows various circuits mounted on an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of a backup memory board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main process, and the figure which shows the process priority. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the CPU exception event occurrence processing and the example of the VDP error interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for effect control. It is a figure which shows the content example of the effect control command for a game. It is a figure which shows the content example of the production control command which becomes a test command. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the reception order of a test command and the processing to execute. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the backup control table. It is a figure which shows the specific example which displays the maintenance history screen. It is a figure which shows the specific example which displays the maintenance history screen. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the setting change / confirmation history selection operation is performed. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 41AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 42AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 42AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 43AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 44AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 45AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display (also referred to as variable display)" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol may be displayed. Variable display (also called a production pattern) is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passage gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32 or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of directly executing using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 069F of the Embodiment)
In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there have been game machines having a big hit having a long ending period and a short big hit in which the ending effect of the big hit is executed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-7165). In the gaming machine of JP-A-2007-7165, a short ending time is selected in the case of a probabilistic jackpot. However, when advantageous jackpots occur consecutively, the ending period is shortened, the interval between the jackpot and the next jackpot is shortened, and the speed at which the prize ball can be obtained becomes faster, resulting in gambling. Was too high. The game machines according to the inventions 069F to 071F that solve such a problem are proposed below.

Further, conventionally, there has been a game machine in which an advantageous jackpot is set to have a longer fanfare period at the start of the jackpot than a disadvantageous jackpot (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-148). However, simply setting a long fanfare period for a favorable jackpot may lead to a decline in interest. The following are proposed game machines according to the inventions 073F and 074F that solve such a problem. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the inventions 069F to 071F, the invention 073F, and the invention 074F will be represented as the feature section 069F. The feature unit 069F is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. Hereinafter, the description of the configuration common to that of FIG. 1 will not be repeated.

The game area 2 formed on the surface of the game board includes a left game area 2A on the left side of the top surface of the image display device 5 and a right game area 2B on the right side. If the left game area 2A, which is the first game area, and the right game area 2B, which is the second game area, are separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement PL of nails inside the game area 2. Good. When the game ball launched from the ball striking device and driven into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 2A, which is the first game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement PL of the nails. , It becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area 2B which is the second game area.

A normal winning ball device 6A is provided in the left game area 2A. For example, the ordinary winning ball device 6A is provided below the center of the image display device 5. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. As described above, the left game area 2A is provided with the ordinary winning ball device 6A that always forms the first starting winning opening into which the game ball can enter.

A variable winning ball device 6B is usually provided in the right game area 2B. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 8-2. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory and forms a second starting winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball does not pass through the second starting winning opening. Put it in a state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball can pass through the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. Make it open. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening, while the expanded open state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. May be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. In this way, the right game area 2B is normally variable, which can be changed into a first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second starting winning opening and a second variable state in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass. A winning ball device 6B is provided.

The game ball guided to the left game area 2A, which is the first game area, by the arrangement of the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, etc. in the left game area 2A and the right game area 2B is the second game area. It is impossible or difficult to pass through the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B provided in the right game area 2B. In addition, the game ball guided to the right game area 2B, which is the second game area, has a first start winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A provided in the left game area 2A, which is the first game area. It is impossible or difficult to pass.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 8-2. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 8-2. When a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A and the first reserved storage number is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value, the first start is performed. The condition is met. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B and the second reserved storage number is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value, the second start is performed. The condition is met. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

Two special variable winning ball devices are provided below the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The upper special variable winning ball device 7A is provided with an upper winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82A for the upper winning opening door shown in FIG. 8-2, and is opened and closed by the upper winning opening door. Form a top prize opening that changes to. As an example, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, when the solenoid 82A for the upper winning opening door is in the off state, the upper winning opening door closes the upper winning opening. On the other hand, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, the upper winning opening door opens the upper winning opening when the solenoid 82A for the upper winning opening door is on. The game ball that has entered the upper grand prize opening formed in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is detected by, for example, the upper grand winning opening switch 23A shown in FIG. 8-2. In this embodiment, the upper prize opening and the lower prize opening have the same door shape, but the shapes of the two major winning openings may be different. For example, one of them may be an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a closed state and an open state, such as the normally variable winning ball device 6B, or is stored in the game area 2. It may be a winning opening that changes to a state of protruding from.

The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a lower winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82B for the lower winning opening door shown in FIG. 8-2, and is opened and closed by the lower winning opening door. Form a lower prize opening that changes to. As an example, in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, the lower winning opening door closes the lower winning opening when the solenoid 82B for the lower winning opening door is in the off state. On the other hand, in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, when the solenoid 82B for the lower winning opening door is in the on state, the lower winning opening door opens the lower winning opening. The game ball that has entered the lower grand prize opening formed in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is detected by, for example, the lower grand winning opening switch 23B shown in FIG. 8-2.

A large number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls pass through the upper large winning opening formed by the upper special variable winning ball device 7A and the lower large winning opening formed by the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. That is, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is in the first state which is advantageous for the player by opening the upper winning opening by the upper winning opening door. The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the first state which is advantageous for the player by opening the lower special winning opening by the lower large winning opening door. On the other hand, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is in a second state which is disadvantageous to the player by closing the upper winning opening by the upper winning opening door. The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in a second state, which is disadvantageous to the player, by closing the lower winning opening with the lower winning opening door. In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass through the upper and lower prize openings, or in addition to the closed state, the game ball is partially open so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the upper and lower prize openings. A state may be provided.

Inside the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, a discharge path is provided so that the game ball that has entered the upper special winning ball device 7A opened by the upper special winning ball device 7A is discharged from the upper special variable winning ball device 7A. There is. The game ball discharged from the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is detected by the first discharge switch 24C installed in the discharge path.

Inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, a game ball that has entered the lower large winning opening opened by the lower large winning opening door passes through or does not pass through a predetermined probability variation region, and is below. A guidance path is provided to guide the player to the discharge path discharged from the special variable winning ball device 7B. The game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B first passes through a path provided with a lower large winning opening switch 23B for detecting the winning game ball, and then has a taxiway to the probability change region and a probability change. It is guided to the branch point to the taxiway that does not pass through the area and leads to the discharge path. When the game ball guided to the branch point flows down the taxiway to the probability change region, the game ball is detected by the probability change area switch 24A, so that the probability change control condition for entering the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state is set. To establish. That is, the place where the probability change area switch 24A is installed is set as the probability change area, and a predetermined probability change control condition can be satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has passed through this probability change area. Since the probability variation region is inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, only the game balls that have won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through.

The probability variation region is changed into an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass by the probability variation region lid driven by the solenoid 82C for the probability variation region lid. As an example, when the solenoid 82C for the probability change region lid is in the off state, the probability change region lid moves to a position where the probability change region lid is closed, and the probability change region is closed. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82C for the probability variation region lid is in the ON state, the probability variation region lid moves to a position where the probability variation region is not blocked, and the probability variation region is opened. The game ball that has reached the branch point when the probability variation region is in the closed state does not pass through the probability variation region and is discharged as it is from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. In this case, the game ball is detected by the second discharge switch 24B installed in the common discharge path. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the branch point when the probability variation region is in the open state passes through the probability variation region and is detected by the probability variation region switch 24A installed in the probability variation region. Then, the game ball that has passed through the probability variation region is discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. When the game ball that has won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B passes through the probability change region, the probability change area switch 24A is controlled to the probability change state based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the probability change region. Therefore, the ratio of the game ball winning the lower special variable winning ball device 7B and the ratio of controlling the probability variation state by adjusting the length of time and the timing of the probability variation region lid in the allowable position are preferably set. be able to.

In the present embodiment, at least the periphery of the probability variation region in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is configured to be visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to confirm whether or not the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B has passed the probability variation region.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in the left gaming area 2A, the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 8-2. The first starting condition is satisfied by the fact that it has been done. After that, for example, a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. Is started.

When the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in the right game area 2B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 8-2. The second starting condition is satisfied by the above. After that, for example, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, etc., the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is started. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, the game ball is difficult or unable to pass through the second starting winning opening.

In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state different from the probabilistic state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the second variable state, so that the game ball is difficult or impossible to pass through the second starting winning opening. .. Therefore, the special figure game using the second special figure is not started. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, which is not yet controlled to the probabilistic state, the player guides the game ball to the left gaming area 2A, and a special drawing game using the first special drawing based on the winning of the first starting winning opening. And aim for the "big hit" of the special figure game. In the big hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result of "big hit" is derived as a result of the special figure game using the first special figure, the game ball enters the lower special variable winning ball device 7B in a specific round. Furthermore, it becomes possible to pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability change area, the probability change confirmation flag is set, and the transition to the special game state controlled by the probability change state is confirmed. After that, when the big hit game state ends, it is controlled to the probability change state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B changes to the first variable state, and the game ball can pass through the second start winning opening. In the present embodiment, the second special figure game is more advantageous than the first special figure game. Therefore, the player guides the game ball to the right game area 2A, starts a special figure game using the second special figure based on the winning in the second start winning opening, and "big hit" of the special figure game. Will be aimed at. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various gaming experiences that change according to the gaming state.

In the big hit game state, the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening is opened, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A or the lower special variable winning ball device 7B becomes the first state advantageous for the player. Then, during a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the upper or lower prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the upper or lower prize opening is continued. A round game to be opened is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the upper prize opening and the lower prize opening are closed, and the winning balls are difficult or impossible to generate. When a game ball enters the upper prize opening, the upper prize opening switch 23A detects the winning ball, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. When a game ball enters the lower prize opening, the lower prize opening switch 23B detects the winning ball, and similarly, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached. Therefore, in the big hit game state, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls extremely easily, which is an advantageous game state for the player. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the probability of the variable display result becoming a "big hit" may be controlled to a probability variation state higher than the normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined probability variation control condition. In the present embodiment, the probability variation control condition is that the probability variation region switch 24A detects the passage of the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B from the lower grand prize opening to the probability variation region. This probabilistic state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed. That is, the end of the variable display a predetermined number of times is a probability change end condition.

In the probabilistic state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, which is in the second variable state in the normal state, is divided into a first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second starting winning opening and a second variable state in which the game ball cannot pass. Change. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B into the first variable state and the second variable state is called electric chew opening control. In the present embodiment, the second special figure game started based on the game ball passing through the second starting winning opening is started based on passing through the first starting winning opening that can be passed even in the normal state. It is more advantageous for the player than the first special figure game. Therefore, the probabilistic state in which the electric chew release control is executed is a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

When the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the electric chew release control may not be performed. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the upper limit time for the upper big prize opening and the lower big winning opening to be open in the big hit game state is short, and the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass. The game is executed, and after the end of the big hit game state, it may be controlled to the probability change state. In such a case, the jackpot type is also referred to as "probability". Then, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden probability" when the electric chew release control is not performed, the probability change state is set after the end of the big hit game state and the probability change control is performed. The electric chew release control may not be performed.

The game balls used as a game medium in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recorded information of the points given according to the number of the game balls have, for example, valuable values that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity. All you need is. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and scores may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, although it cannot be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize.

Further, the game value that can be given by the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to paying out the game ball as a prize ball and giving points, for example, controlling to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probability change state. The rate at which a more advantageous jackpot game state is selected is the first rate, which is higher than the second rate, and the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the second. It may be included that the number of first rounds is larger than the number of rounds, and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is the first probability higher than the second probability, which is an advantageous gaming situation for the player. ..

In this embodiment, a round game with a number of rounds according to the jackpot type is executed. Of these, when the number of times the round game is executed becomes "3" as the specific number of times, the round game in which the lower large winning opening is opened is executed, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is advantageous for the player. It becomes the first state. On the other hand, when the number of times the round game is executed is other than "3" as the specific number of times, the round game in which the upper large winning opening is opened is executed, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is advantageous for the player. It becomes a state. In the third round game, since the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the first state and the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through the probability variation region, these round games are performed. It is also called a probabilistic open round game. On the other hand, a round game in which the upper special variable winning ball device 7A other than the third time is in the first state is also referred to as a normal open round game. Further, the jackpot game state executed based on one "big hit" is included in a plurality of rounds, with the period in which one round game is executed as one round. Of these, the round in which the lower special variable winning ball device 7B executed for the third time is in the open state is expressed as a lower open round. The other rounds in which the upper special variable winning device 7A is in the open state are referred to as upper open rounds. That is, when the variable display result is "big hit", in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", the round game in which the operation time of the lower big prize door is provided and the upper big prize Perform multiple round games, including a round game with an operating time for the door.

In the present embodiment, as a big hit type when the variable display result is "big hit", in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", the number of executions of the round game is "3" as a specific number of times. When, there are a plurality of types of jackpots with different upper limit times for opening the lower prize opening. As an example, when the jackpot type is "first jackpot", it is controlled to the "first jackpot game state" in which the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is set to 52 milliseconds. When the jackpot type is "second jackpot" or "third jackpot", the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is controlled to be longer than the first jackpot game state. In the first big hit game state, since the control time for opening is as short as 52 milliseconds, the rate at which the game ball can actually win the lower big winning opening and enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is "first jackpot", it is unlikely that the game ball will pass through the lower jackpot, and it is difficult to establish the probability variation control condition for entering the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, in the second big hit or the third big hit game state, it is opened for about 29 seconds, so if the game ball is guided to the right game area 2B where the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is installed, the game ball is at a high rate. Can enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. Therefore, after the end of the big hit game state, the probability change control condition for entering the probability change state is likely to be established.

Which of the plurality of types of jackpots is used is determined at a predetermined ratio, for example, in response to the decision to set the variable display result as "big hit" at the start of the special figure game. When a game ball enters the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, not only a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, but also the game ball passes through the probability change area depending on the position of the probability change area lid, and the variable display result becomes a "big hit". The probability is controlled to a higher probable state than the non-probable state. Therefore, the second jackpot and the third jackpot gaming states are more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot gaming state. Further, the third big hit game state is more advantageous to the player than the second big hit game state from the viewpoint that the prize balls are paid out more in the upper open round. The second jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot from the viewpoint of paying out the prize ball and the establishment of the probability variation control condition.

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B according to a predetermined procedure. Will be executed.

Following the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a probability change area solenoid control process for controlling the position of the probability change area lid and whether the probability change area is valid or invalid. In the probabilistic region solenoid control process, the CPU 103 controls opening and closing of the probabilistic region lid based on the value of the probabilistic region solenoid control code set in the predetermined region of the RAM 102 in the jackpot gaming state being set to "1". Then, the valid / invalid switching control of the probabilistic region is executed. For example, opening and closing of the probability change area lid and switching of validity / invalidity of the probability change area are executed based on the probability change solenoid pattern table. The probabilistic solenoid pattern table may be a table in which the timing of switching the open / closed state of the probabilistic region lid and the timing of switching the validity / invalidity of the probabilistic region are stored in association with the elapsed time from the start of the round in the round game. Alternatively, when the lower prize opening is open in a chain with the opening and closing of the lower prize opening, the probability variation region may also be in the open state and the probability variation region may be valid. On the other hand, when the lower prize opening is closed, the probabilistic region may also be closed and the probabilistic region may be invalidated. In the probability variation area solenoid control process, a usage pattern is selected from a plurality of probability variation solenoid pattern tables stored in the ROM 101 according to the jackpot type and the number of rounds of the round game to be executed. Then, based on the selected usage pattern, the probability variation area detection valid flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated. Further, by updating the probabilistic region solenoid buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 according to the value of the read solenoid output designation data, the solenoid 82C for the probabilistic region lid is turned on / off according to the solenoid output designation data. To control. That is, the position of the probability variation region lid is controlled. The probabilistic region solenoid buffer is an output buffer for outputting a control signal for designating on / off to the solenoid 82C for the probabilistic region lid, and probabilistic change in command control processing according to the value stored in this buffer. A control signal is output to the solenoid 82C for the area lid.

FIG. 8-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 8-3, the CPU 103 performs any of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Select and execute. Of the explanations of these processes, the same explanations as those described with reference to FIG. 7 are not repeated.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this jackpot opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the execution of the round game according to the jackpot type is started in the jackpot game state, and the upper jackpot or the lower jackpot is opened. It includes processing to set the open state. In the present embodiment, in this jackpot opening preprocessing, it is determined whether or not the round game to be started is a probability variation opening round in which the lower jackpot is opened, and if it is a probability variation opening round, it is determined. , The process of setting the probabilistic region solenoid control code to 1 is further included as common control data supporting the start of the position control of the probabilistic region lid and the start of the effective / invalid control of the probabilistic region. In addition, a process of updating the solenoid output data table is further included depending on the opening of the winning prize. When the jackpot release preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the upper prize opening or the lower prize opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the upper prize opening switch 23A, or the lower prize opening switch 23B Based on the number of game balls detected by the player, a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the upper prize opening or the lower prize opening from the open state to the closed state is included. In this big hit opening process, the lower big winning opening detection process is further executed in the probability change opening round. The lower special variable winning opening detection process is based on the number of game balls won in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B and the number of game balls discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. A process of counting the game balls in the device 7B, a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball to the probability variation region is detected, and a probability variation confirmation flag when the passage of the probability variation region is detected when the probability variation region is valid. Includes the process of setting. Then, when the upper prize opening or the lower prize opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". In this embodiment, when the round game is completed, regardless of which of the upper prize opening and the lower prize opening is closed, the processing of closing the upper prize opening and the lower prize opening are closed. The process of closing the winning opening is executed together. For this reason, it is not necessary to determine whether the target of the closing process is either the upper prize opening or the lower prize opening. Further, even if the number of large winning openings to be used is reduced or increased, it is only necessary to delete or add the process of closing, so that the design change is easy.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round game in which the upper prize opening or the lower prize opening is open has reached a predetermined upper limit, or the upper limit has not been reached. In some cases, it includes a process of waiting until the next round game is started. In the present embodiment, in the big hit opening post-processing, the above-mentioned lower big winning opening detection processing is further executed in the probability variation opening round. Further, in the big hit opening post-processing, a process that allows execution of control after the running round is further performed based on the number of game balls in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B counted by the big winning opening detection process. included. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses, a process of making various settings for controlling the probabilistic state and the time saving state according to the success or failure of the probabilistic control condition, and the like. Then, when the setting for controlling the probability change state or the time saving state is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 8-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 8-3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; NO), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage count value and updating, the second special figure is updated so that the reserved storage number is subtracted by 1, and the second special figure is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" in the hold storage unit 151B is shifted upward one entry at a time (step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total hold storage count value stored by the total hold storage counter to be subtracted by 1. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure hold storage number is the number of hold storages of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. do it. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S235 (step S235; NO), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" in the hold storage unit is shifted upward one entry at a time (step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total hold storage count value stored by the total hold storage counter to be subtracted by 1. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, it is determined whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines the special figure display result as a "big hit" depending on whether or not the probability change state is performed. It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of which of "" and "loss". The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the random number buffer for variation.

FIG. 8-5 (A) shows a determination example in the process of step S239. In this determination example, the determination ratio of whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" is different depending on the presence or absence of the probability variation control in the probability variation state. More specifically, when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is determined as "big hit" at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state. Therefore, in the probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and the big hit game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state in which the probabilistic change control is not performed. That is, the probabilistic state in which the probabilistic control is performed is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in which the probabilistic control is not performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; YES), for example, the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step). S241), the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to the determination result of which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be selected according to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value and the like. Just do it. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type read from the variable random number buffer.

FIG. 8-5 (B) shows a determination example in the process of step S242. In this determination example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed in the special diagram game in which the start condition is satisfied is the first special diagram or the second special symbol. ing. Here, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the start condition of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, and the variable special figure becomes the first special figure. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the start condition of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied, and the variable special figure becomes the second special figure. In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the big hit type is determined to be either "first big hit" or "second big hit". On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the jackpot type is determined only to "third jackpot". That is, the jackpot type is determined to be "first jackpot" and "second jackpot" only when the variable special map is the first special map. In this way, different jackpot types may be determined according to the special symbol that is variably displayed in the special figure game. In addition, the jackpot type is determined to be "third jackpot" only when the variable special map is the second special map.

In this embodiment, a round game with a number of rounds according to the jackpot type is executed, and the lower jackpot is opened in a predetermined probability variation opening round in the jackpot game state. In the normal open round, the upper prize opening is open. Here, when the jackpot type is "2nd jackpot" and "3rd jackpot", in the predetermined probability variation opening round in the jackpot game state, the lower jackpot is selected as compared with the case where the jackpot type is "1st jackpot". The upper limit time for the open state becomes long, and the probability change control condition for entering the probability change state after the end of the big hit game state is likely to be satisfied. By determining the jackpot type by the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the jackpot game is performed at a higher rate than when it is the first special figure. The probability change control condition for entering the probability change state after the end of the state is satisfied. That is, when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the second special figure game, the probability variation control condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the first special figure game.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "first jackpot", the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is as short as 52 milliseconds, so the rate at which the game ball enters the lower jackpot is very high. Low. Therefore, the rate at which the probability variation control condition is satisfied is very low. On the other hand, in the case of "second big hit" and "third big hit", since the upper limit time is 29 seconds, the probability that the game ball enters the lower big winning opening is high. Therefore, the rate at which the probability variation control condition is satisfied is high. In the present embodiment, when a "big hit" is obtained in the probabilistic state, the jackpot type is determined to be "second big hit" or "third big hit", so that the special game is controlled from the normal game state to the probable change state. While lowering the rate of being in a state, it is possible to set that "big hit" continues at a high rate once the probability change state is controlled. Regarding the "second jackpot", the rate at which the probability variation control condition is satisfied is higher than that of the "first jackpot" as in the "third jackpot", but since the number of rounds is smaller than that of the third jackpot, the "big hit" is The number of balls to be paid out as prize balls will be reduced.

To explain the mechanism concretely, in the special figure game using the first special figure, when the variable display result is "big hit", it becomes the first big hit at a predetermined ratio, and based on the "big hit". The probability variation control condition is not satisfied in the jackpot game state controlled by the player, and after the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the normal gaming state which is not controlled by the probability variation state. On the other hand, in the case of the "second big hit" in the special figure game using the first special figure, the probability variation control condition is satisfied at a high rate in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", and the big hit game After the state ends, it is controlled to a special gaming state controlled to a probabilistic state. In the special game state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, and the special figure game using the second special figure can be started. In the special figure game using the second special figure, when the variable display result becomes a "big hit", it always becomes a "third big hit", so that the probability is controlled again after the big hit ends. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, the "big hit" and the probable change state continue continuously until all the special figure games of the predetermined number of times become "missing" and the probability change end condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, in the first special figure game performed in the normal gaming state, the ratio of the variable display result of the jackpot type "second jackpot" is reduced, while the variable display result of the "second jackpot" is once obtained. After being derived, the rate of continuous probabilistic state and "big hit" increases, so it is possible to provide a sharp and exciting game experience.

After executing the process of step S242, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). In the process of step S243, the jackpot type may be stored by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. Good.

When it is determined in step S240 that it is not a "big hit" (step S240; NO), or after the process of step S243 is executed, a pre-determined result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and further, a big hit. A definite special symbol is set according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state (step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is not a "big hit", it becomes a lost symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "missed". The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. It may be set as a definite special symbol. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "first jackpot", the symbol "5" or "9" is used, and when the jackpot type is "second jackpot", the symbol "3" is used. In the case of "3 big hits", the symbol "7" is set, and the special symbol indicating each is set as the finalized symbol.

After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in step S245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 8-3 is executed.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; YES), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S246), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, has the effect control command for designating the demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Judge whether or not. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 8-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 8-3 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special figure confirmation display flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the game control flag setting unit 152, is on. (Step S261). The special figure confirmed display flag is set to the on state in response to the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the special symbol confirmation display flag is off in step S261 (step S261; NO), a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol is made (step S262), and a command transmission setting at the time of symbol confirmation is set. It is performed (step S263). For example, the effect control command prepared in advance as the symbol determination command is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12. Further, a predetermined fixed time is set as the special figure display time (step S264). Then, after the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the ON state (step S265), the special symbol stop process is terminated. At this time, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the special symbol stop process is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is on in step S261 (step S261; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S266). At this time, if the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed (step S266; NO), the special symbol stop process is terminated. Here, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the special symbol stop process is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs, and the process waits until the special figure confirmation display time elapses.

If the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S266 (step S266; YES), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S267), whether or not the jackpot flag is on. (Step S268). Then, when the jackpot flag is on (step S268; YES), the fanfare effect time according to the jackpot type is set (step S269).

FIG. 8-7 is a diagram showing a fanfare time table. With reference to FIG. 8-7, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B), the jackpot occurs at the first hit when the jackpot occurs in the low base state and in the high base state, respectively. The fanfare production time is set in advance according to the type of jackpot, as opposed to the time of continuous chan.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the transmission setting of the jackpot start designation command capable of specifying the fanfare effect time according to the jackpot type is set (step S270), and the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152 is set. The jackpot start flag provided in the predetermined area of is set to the on state (step S271). Subsequently, a setting for ending the probability variation control is performed (step S272). For example, as the process of step S272, a process of clearing the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like to turn it off, or a probability change for counting the remaining number of times of the special figure game in which the probability change control is performed. A process such as clearing the number of times counter may be executed.

The probability variation counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control counter setting unit 154, and corresponds to the upper limit number of times of the special figure game in which the probability variation control is performed when the probability variation state is reached after the end of the big hit game state. The initial count value may be set.

After executing the process of step S272, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (step S273), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" and the next timer interrupt occurs, the jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 shown in FIG. 8-3 is executed.

If the jackpot flag is off in step S268 (step S268; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is initialized to "0" (step S274). After executing the process of step S274, it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation control (step S275). As an example, in the process of step S275, when the probability variation count value, which is the stored value of the probability variation counter, is other than "0", the count value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the update probability variation count is updated. It is determined whether or not the count value matches a predetermined probability change end determination value. At this time, if it matches the probability change end determination value, the probability change control may be ended by clearing a predetermined probability change flag or the like. On the other hand, if it does not match the probability change end determination value, the process of step S275 may be ended by maintaining the state of the probability change flag.

After the process of step S275 is executed, the setting for transmitting the game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made (step S276), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" and the next timer interrupt process occurs, the special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 8-3 is executed.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 8-3 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is on (step S291). The jackpot flag is set to the on state by the process of step S271 shown in FIG. 8-6 in response to the start of the jackpot gaming state.

When the jackpot start flag is on in step S291 (step S291; YES), it is determined whether or not the fanfare production time has elapsed (step S292). At this time, if the fanfare effect time has not elapsed (step S292; NO), the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. Here, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the jackpot release preprocessing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs, and the fanfare production time waits until it elapses.

When the fanfare production time has elapsed in step S292 (step S292; YES), as a process for starting the first round game in the jackpot game state, after clearing the jackpot start flag and turning it off (step S292). S293), for example, a round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the control counter setting unit 154 is set with "1" as a count initial value corresponding to the number of times the round game is executed (step S294).

When the jackpot start flag is off in step S291 (step S291; NO), or after executing the process of step S294, for example, from the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, FIG. 8-4 shows. The jackpot type buffer value indicating the jackpot type determined in step S245 is read out, and for example, a round indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started from a round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control counter setting unit. Read the count value (step S295).

Then, the CPU 103 forms a special winning ball device 7A with a big winning opening to be opened in the round game to be started based on the jackpot type buffer value and the round count value read in step S295. It is determined to be either the large winning opening or the lower special winning opening formed in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B (step S296). When the round count value is "3", it is decided to execute a round game in which the lower prize opening is open. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", it is decided to execute the round game in which the upper prize opening is opened. Therefore, when the number of times the round game is executed becomes "3" as the specific number of times, the round game in which the lower large winning opening is opened is executed, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is the first advantageous for the player. It becomes a state.

The CPU 103 may set a detection enable switch for effectively detecting the game ball in accordance with determining the big winning opening to be opened by the process of step S296. For example, when the round count value is "3", the detection of the game ball by the lower prize opening switch 23B is enabled in accordance with the opening state of the lower prize opening. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", the detection of the game ball by the upper prize opening switch 23A is enabled in accordance with the opening state of the upper prize opening.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the opening large winning opening determined in step S296 is the lower winning opening (step S297), and if it is the lower winning opening (step S297; YES), It is determined whether or not the value of the probabilistic region solenoid control code set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "0" (step S298), and if the value of the probabilistic region solenoid control code is "0" (step). S298; YES), the value of the probabilistic region solenoid control code is set to "1", which is a value corresponding to the probabilistic region control pattern setting process (S299). The probabilistic region solenoid control code is a control flag that specifies the position control of the probabilistic region lid using the probabilistic region solenoid in the probabilistic region solenoid control region. When the position control of the probabilistic region lid is not performed, "0" It is set to "1" when the position control of the probability variation area lid is started. If it is determined in step S298 that the value of the probability variation region solenoid control code is not "0" (step S298: NO), the jackpot opening preprocessing is terminated. Therefore, according to such a process, even if it is decided to open the lower prize opening, if the value of the probability variation region solenoid control code is not "0", that is, the previous lower prize opening is opened. When the probability variation area lid corresponding to the round is controlled, it is possible to prevent the round for opening the lower prize opening from starting.

In step S297, if it is determined that the determined open winning opening is not the lower winning opening (step S297; NO), or if the processing of step S299 is completed, the opening pattern of the large winning opening according to the jackpot type The large winning opening opening pattern table determination process for setting is executed (step S300). According to such processing, when it is decided to open the upper prize opening, the value of the probabilistic region solenoid control code is not referred to, so regardless of whether the probabilistic region lid is controlled or not. You can start a round to open the top prize opening.

After executing the process of step S300, the solenoid control process for controlling each solenoid is executed (step S301).

After executing the process of step S301, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the process during jackpot opening (step S302).

After executing the process of step S302, the CPU 103 determines the interval time from closing the upper prize opening to opening the lower prize opening, or closing the lower prize opening and then opening the upper prize. The interval time setting process for setting the interval time until the mouth is opened is executed (step S303). After executing the process of step S303, the CPU 103 ends the big hit release pre-processing.

FIG. 8-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 8-3 as the process during the jackpot opening. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 8-9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined maximum winning determination value (step S341). When the maximum winning determination value has not been reached in step S341 (step S341; NO), it is determined whether or not the end code is set in the work table before opening the large winning opening (step S342). If it is determined that the end code is not set (step S342; NO), the electric accessory opening pattern processing is executed (step S343). The electric accessory opening pattern processing is a process of opening and closing the upper winning opening or the lower winning opening according to the opening / closing pattern shown by the large winning opening opening pattern table determined in the process of step S300 of FIG. 8-8. ..

After executing the process of step S343 in FIG. 8-9, it is determined whether or not the count switch is on by checking the detection signal transmitted from the count switch or the like (step S344). For example, in the process of step S344, the detection signal transmitted from the count switch of the grand prize opening whose opening / closing control is performed is checked among the upper prize opening and the lower grand prize opening. Then, when the count switch is off (step S344; NO), the process of opening the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the count switch is on (step S344; YES), the winning number count value is updated to be added by 1 (step S345), and then the jackpot opening process is terminated.

When the winning number count value reaches the maximum winning determination value in step S341 (step S341; YES), for example, the drive of the solenoid corresponding to the large winning opening where the opening / closing control is performed is stopped to win the large prize. A setting is made to close the mouth (step S346). For example, when the large winning opening for which opening / closing control is performed is the upper winning opening, the driving of the solenoid 82A for the upper winning opening door is stopped to close the upper winning opening.

After executing the process of step S346, or when it is determined that the end code is set in the process of step S342 (step S342; YES), the round end command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S347).

Next, the CPU 103 determines, based on the round count value, whether or not the ending round is a round that opens the lower prize opening (step S348). Then, when it is determined that the round is for opening the lower prize opening (step S348; YES), the value of the probabilistic region solenoid control code is set to "3", which is a value corresponding to the probabilistic region control execution process. (Step S349).

After executing the process of step S350, or when it is determined in the process of step S348 that it is not a round to open the lower prize opening (step S348; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is set to the process after opening the big hit. After updating to the corresponding value "6" (step S352), the process during jackpot opening is terminated.

FIG. 8-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S116 of FIG. 8-3 as the process after opening the jackpot. In the jackpot release post-processing shown in FIG. 8-10, the CPU 103 first updates the interval timer value so that it is subtracted by 1 (step S361). At this time, it is determined whether or not the updated interval timer value has become "0" (step S362). Then, when the interval timer value is other than "0" (step S362; NO), the processing after opening the jackpot is terminated.

When the interval timer value is "0" in step S362 (step S362; YES), it is determined whether or not the round count value has reached the upper limit round count value (step S363). If the round count value is less than the upper limit round count value (step S363; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S364). , End the processing after opening the jackpot. In this way, until the round count value is determined to be the upper limit round count value by the process of step S363, the process of steps S115 to S116 of FIG. 8-3 is repeatedly executed, so that the big winning opening is in the big hit game state. Can be executed multiple times with the open state.

When it is determined in step S363 that the round count value is the upper limit round count value (step S363; YES), the ending effect time according to the jackpot type is set (step S366). At this time, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off.

FIG. 8-11 is a diagram showing an ending time table. With reference to FIG. 8-11, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) and 8-11 (B), big hits occur at the first hit when a big hit occurs in the low base state and in the high base state, respectively. The ending production time is set in advance according to the jackpot type, as opposed to the continuous chan time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 8-11, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the jackpot end designation command capable of specifying the ending effect time according to the jackpot type to the effect control board 12 (step S367). .. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S368), and then the jackpot release post-processing is terminated. The CPU 103 may count the number of continuations of the time-saving state and make it identifiable by the EXT data of the jackpot end designation command or the like, and notify the effect control board 12 of the number of continuations of the time-saving state.

FIG. 8-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S117 of FIG. 8-3 as the jackpot end process. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 8-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step S381). As an example, in the process of step S365 in the process after opening the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-10, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the ending effect time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S381, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Correspondingly, it may be determined whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed. If the ending effect time has not elapsed in step S381 (step S381; NO), the jackpot end process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the ending effect time has elapsed in step S381 (step S381; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the passage flag is on (step S382). Here, the passage flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when the probability variation region switch 24A detects passage of the game ball to the probability variation region.

When the passage flag is on in step S382 (step S382; YES), the probability change control is started to set the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the probability change state (step S383). As an example, in the process of step S383, in addition to setting the probability variation flag to the on state, the initial count value corresponding to the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation state is set in the probability variation counter. .. After that, the passage flag is reset to the off state (step S384). In the process of step S383, the setting for starting the time saving control in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state may be executed.

After executing the process of step S384, or when the pass flag is not turned on in the process of step S382 (step S382; NO), a setting for starting the high base control is performed (step S385). As an example, in the process of step S385, the time saving flag and the advantageous state flag are set to the on state, and a predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time saving state is set. , The special figure fluctuation count counter may be set.

After executing the process of step S385, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S386), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In this effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit. .. Of the explanations of these processes, the same explanations as those described with reference to FIG. 7 are not repeated.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot start processing. To do. Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The jackpot start process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this jackpot start process, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable display time. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round.

The process during the round of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this round processing, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display during the round. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "6", which is a value corresponding to the round post-processing. If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the post-processing after the big hit.

The round post-processing in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this round post-processing, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round.

The post-hit process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this post-hit processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control on the image display device 5 to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process.

FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure hit waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. 8-13. In the special figure hit waiting process shown in FIG. 8-14, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step S720). When the symbol confirmation designation command is not received (step S720; NO), the special symbol hit waiting process is terminated.

When the symbol confirmation designation command is received (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the confirmation decoration symbol (step S722). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final decoration symbol is a jackpot symbol (step S723). When the final decoration symbol is not a big hit symbol (step S723: NO), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S726), and the special symbol hit waiting process is performed. To finish.

When the final decoration symbol is a jackpot symbol (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received (step S730). If the hit start designation command is not received (step S730; NO), the special figure hit wait process ends.

When the hit start designation command is received (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect (step S733A) as described in FIG. 8-17 described later, and the fanfare effect time timer. The value is set (step S733B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot start process (step S174) (step S734), and the special figure hit wait process ends.

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot start process executed in step S174 of FIG. 8-13. In the big hit start process shown in FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the big winning opening opening notification command has been received (step S741). Here, the big winning opening notification command is a command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state.

When the notification command for opening the big winning opening is not received (step S741; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect execution process shown in FIG. 8-16 (step S742), and ends the big hit start process. .. As an example, in the process of step S742, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1, and the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, an effect of displaying a jackpot display symbol and displaying characters, characters, or the like indicating that a jackpot has occurred is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out, and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data and switches to the process data set next in the process table. , Set the process timer setting value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

When receiving the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening (step S741; YES), the setting for starting the big hit middle effect is made (step S743). As an example, in the process of step S743, the effect during the round is selected based on the content of the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening, then the process table corresponding to the effect during the round is selected, and the process timer is started.

Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S744), and then the jackpot start processing is ended.

FIG. 8-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the fanfare effect execution process. With reference to FIGS. 8-16, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the fanfare effect time timer value (step 069FS111). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fanfare effect time timer value has become 0 (step 069FS112).

When it is determined that the fanfare effect time timer value is not 0 (NO in step 069FS112), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start of the fanfare effect time (step 069FS113).

If it is determined that it is the start of the fanfare effect time (YES in step 069FS113), the effect control CPU 120 selects a notification effect according to the jackpot type and the number of consecutive chans (step 069FS114), and starts the jackpot type suggestion display. (Step 069FS115). The notification effect is an effect for notifying the type of effect executed in the big hit round. The jackpot type suggestion display is a display for suggesting a jackpot type.

When it is determined that it is not the start of the fanfare effect time (NO in step 069FS113), and after step 069FS115, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start of the notification effect (step 069FS121). The start time of the notification effect is predetermined for each fanfare effect time. For example, when the fanfare effect time is 13 seconds and 20 seconds, the time is 5 seconds and 7 seconds from the start of the fanfare effect time, respectively. Is.

If it is determined that it is the start of the notification effect (YES in step 069FS121), the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the notification effect selected based on the jackpot type (step 069FS122).

When it is determined that it is not the start of the notification effect (NO in step 069FS121), and after step 069FS122, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the started notification effect is a notification effect that accepts the player's selection. Is determined (step 069FS123). When it is determined that the notification effect accepts the player's selection (YES in step 069FS123), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection acceptance period in the notification effect is available (step 069FS124).

When it is determined that the selection acceptance period (YES in step 069FS124), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection has been accepted (step 069FS125). If it is determined that the selection has been accepted (YES in step 069FS125), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content at the time of the big hit round (step 069FS126).

If it is determined that the notification effect does not accept the player's selection (NO in step 069FS123), and if it is determined that the selection acceptance period is not available (NO in step 069FS124), it is determined that the selection is not accepted (NO in step 069FS125). In the case and after step 069FS126, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the caller of the fanfare effect execution process.

FIG. 8-17 is a timing chart showing an example of the fanfare effect. With reference to FIG. 8-17, in the setting of the fanfare effect executed in step S733A of FIG. 8-14 described above, the following is set. When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R normal jackpot, 13 seconds is set as the fanfare production time in step 733A as shown in FIG. 8-7, and FIG. 8-17 (A). The effect data is set so that the effect indicated by) is executed.

FIG. 8-17 (A) shows a timing chart when it is decided to make a 6R normal jackpot. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is a 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The jackpot type notification effect is executed as the notification effect in 8 seconds from the 5th second to the 13th second of the fanfare effect time. The jackpot type notification effect is an effect of notifying a confirmed jackpot type. Right-handed notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the jackpot type suggestion display and the jackpot type notification effect are executed to thereafter.

When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R probability variation jackpot, 13 seconds is set as the fanfare production time in step 733A as shown in FIG. 8-7, and FIG. 8-17 (B). ) Or the effect shown in FIG. 8-17 (C) is decided by lottery (for example, it is decided to execute the effect shown in FIG. 8-17 (B) at a rate of 30%, and 70%. It is determined that the effect shown in FIG. 8-17 (C) is executed at a rate), and the effect data is set so that the determined effect is executed.

FIG. 8-17 (B) shows the first timing chart when it is decided to make a 6R probability variation jackpot. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is a 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

A round promotion effect is executed as a notification effect in 8 seconds from the 5th second to the 13th second of the fanfare production time. The round promotion effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the player has been promoted from a jackpot that is less advantageous to the player to a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. Right-handed notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the jackpot type suggestion display and the round promotion effect are executed to thereafter.

FIG. 8-17 (C) shows a second timing chart when it is decided to make a 6R probability variation jackpot. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is a 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

A music selection effect is executed as a notification effect in 6 seconds from the 5th second to the 11th second of the fanfare production time. The music selection effect is an effect of selecting a music output during a big hit. A special right-handed notification is executed in 2 seconds from the 11th second to the 13th second of the fanfare production time. The above-mentioned right-handed notification is executed by displaying a small "right-handed" in the upper right part of the image display device 5, whereas the special right-handed notification is executed by displaying a large "right" in the central part of the image display device 5. It is executed when "hit" is displayed. The right-handed notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the jackpot type suggestion display, the music selection effect, and the special right-handed notification are executed, and thereafter.

When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot, 20 seconds is set as the fanfare production time in step 733A as shown in FIG. 8-7, and FIG. 8-17 (D). The effect data is set so that the effect indicated by) is executed.

FIG. 8-17 (D) shows a timing chart when it is decided to make a 16R probability variation jackpot. First, in the first 7 seconds of the fanfare production time, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is a 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

A music selection effect is executed as a notification effect in 13 seconds from the 7th second to the 20th second of the fanfare production time. The right-handed notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the jackpot type suggestion display and the music selection effect are executed to after that.

FIG. 8-18 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of the fanfare effect. With reference to FIG. 8-18, in the production in the case of the 6R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 8-17 (B), as shown in FIG. 8-18 (A), the 6R normal jackpot is displayed as a jackpot type suggestion display. An image including the characters "C jackpot" indicating that the image is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (B) and 8-18 (C), an image including the characters "B jackpot" indicating that the result of the round promotion effect is a 6R probability variation jackpot. Is displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, in the production in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 8-17 (D), as shown in FIG. 8-18 (D), as the jackpot type suggestion display, "A" indicating that the 16R probability variation jackpot is used. An image including the characters "big hit" is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (E) and 8-18 (F), the music selection effect is executed, and the player's selection is accepted by the operation of the stick controller 31A. As a result, the selected jackpot is selected. An image including characters indicating that the music inside is "music G" is displayed on the image display device 5.

In the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 8-18 (E), the selection of songs shows the case of 10 songs, but in the case of the 6R probability variation jackpot, there are fewer songs. Let it be a number (for example, 3 songs). As shown in FIGS. 8-17 (C) and 8-17 (D), the 16R probability variation jackpot has more music choices than the 6R probability variation jackpot, but the period of music selection production is longer, so that the player Can prevent it from becoming difficult to select a song.

In addition, when the jackpots are consecutively chanted, the choice of music in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot can be added. The number of choices at the time of the first hit may be less, the same, or more than the number of choices in the case of the 6R probability variation jackpot.

In addition, when the selected music is output, the video is also displayed.

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart showing the details of the in-round processing executed in step S175 of FIG. 8-13. In the process during the round shown in FIG. 8-19, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a designated command has been received after opening the large winning opening (step S751). When the designated command is not received after opening the large winning opening (step S751; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect operation that results in a round effect according to the number of rounds (step S752). The second ending effect selection process shown in FIG. 8-20, which will be described later, is executed (step S752A). As an example, in the process of step S752, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1, and the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, the effect of displaying the jackpot display symbol and displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out, and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data and switches to the process data set next in the process table. , Set the process timer setting value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is "second jackpot" by, for example, reading the EXT data in the jackpot opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11. Step S753).

If the jackpot type is not "second jackpot" in step S753 (step S753; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing during the round.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "second jackpot" in step S753 (step 753; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a probability variation confirmation command has been received from the main board 11 (step S754). .. Here, the probability change confirmation command is a command for notifying that the probability change area switch 24A is turned on and the probability change state is confirmed.

When the probability change confirmation command is received in step S754 (step S754; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the winning effect control (step S755). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a winning effect indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the probability variation region as a winning effect control setting.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning flag indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the probability variation region during the round game to the ON state (step S756).

Whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is set to start the instruction effect when the probability change confirmation command is not received in step S754 (step S754; NO) or after the process of step S756 is executed. (Step S757). Here, the instruction effect is an effect of instructing the player to launch the game ball on the lower special variable winning ball device 7B.

When the setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) is made in step S757 (step S757; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the instruction effect control setting (step S758). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes an instruction effect as an instruction effect control setting.

When the setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) is not performed in step S757 (step S757; NO), or after executing the process of step S758, the effect control CPU 120 performs the notification effect. It is determined whether or not the setting for starting (notification effect start setting) has been made (step S759). Here, the notification effect is an effect of notifying that the game ball has passed through the probability variation region.

When the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) is made in step S759 (step S759; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the notification effect control. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notification effect as a notification effect control setting.

When the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) is not performed in step S759 (step S759; NO), or after executing the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 processes during the round. To finish.

When the command after opening the large winning opening is received in step S751 (step S751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting for starting the interval effect based on the content of the command after opening the large winning opening. (Step S761). Here, the interval effect is an effect of displaying an interval according to the number of rounds. Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the set interval effect and starts the process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “6”, which is a value corresponding to the post-round process (step S762), and ends the process during the round.

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing the details of the round post-processing executed in step S176 of FIG. 8-13. In the round post-processing shown in FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the hit end designation command has been received (step S771). Here, the hit end designation command is a command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state. When the hit end command has not been received (step S771; NO), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the large winning opening opening notification command has been received (step S772).

When the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening is not received (step S772; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for controlling the effect operation that is an interval effect according to the number of rounds (step S773). .. As an example, in the process of step S773, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1, and the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data n. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out, and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data and switches to the process data set next in the process table. , Set the process timer setting value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

When receiving the command during opening of the large winning opening (step S772; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for ending the effect operation that is an interval effect according to the number of rounds (step S774). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is "second jackpot" by, for example, reading the EXT data in the jackpot opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11. Step S775). At this time, when the jackpot type is "second jackpot" (step S775; YES), for example, by reading the EXT data in the jackpot opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11, the following It is determined whether or not the round is 9 rounds (step S776).

When the next round is 9 rounds in step S776 (step S776; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) (step S777). As an example, in the process of step S777, the process table corresponding to the instruction effect is selected and the process timer is started.

On the other hand, when the next round is not 9 rounds in step S776 (step S776; NO), the effect control CPU 120 reads, for example, the EXT data in the large winning opening opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the next round is 10 rounds (step S778).

When the next round is 10 rounds in step S778 (step S778; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning flag is set to the ON state (step S779).

When the winning flag is set to the ON state in step S779 (step S779; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) (step S780). As an example, in the process of step S780, the process table corresponding to the notification effect is selected and the process timer is started.

If the jackpot type is not "second jackpot" in step S775 (step S775; NO), if the next round is not 10 rounds in step S778 (step S778; NO), or if the winning flag is on in step S779. If it is not set to (step S779; NO), it is determined whether or not the next round is any of 13R to 16R (step S783).

When the next round is any of 13R to 16R (step S783; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect selection first process shown in FIG. 8-20 described later.

When the next round is neither 13R to 16R (step S783; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting an effect operation that is a round effect according to the number of rounds (step S781). As an example, in the process of step S781, the process table corresponding to the effect during the round is selected and the process timer is started.

After executing the process of step S777, after executing the process of step S780, after executing the process of step S781, or after executing the process of step S784, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect process flag. The value is updated to "5" corresponding to the processing during the round (step S782), and the post-round processing is completed.

When the hit end command is received in the process of step S771 (S771; YES), the ending effect is set as described with reference to FIG. 8-25 described later (step S782A), and the ending effect time timer value is set. (Step S782B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot end post-processing (step S781), and then the round post-processing ends.

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the ending effect selection first process and the second process. With reference to FIG. 8-20, in the ending effect selection first process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the next round is any of 13R to 15R (step 069FS131). If it is determined to be any of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS131), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the ending effect type has not been accepted yet (step 069FS132).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect has not been accepted (YES in step 069FS132), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting the ending effect selection acceptance display (step 069FS133).

If it is determined that the next round is neither 13R to 15R (NO in step 069FS131), it is determined that the selection of the ending effect is accepted (NO in step 069FS132), and after step 069FS133, the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next round is 16R (step 069FS134).

When it is determined that it is 16R (step 069FS134), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the ending effect type has not been accepted yet (step 069FS135). When it is determined that the selection of the ending effect is accepted (NO in step 069FS135), a setting is made to start an effect of notifying the accepted type of ending effect as the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS136).

If it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect has not been accepted (YES in step 069FS135), the effect control CPU 120 starts an effect of notifying the type of ending effect automatically selected by lottery as the ending effect to be executed. (Step 069FS137).

If it is determined that the next round is not 16R (NO in step 069FS134), after step 069FS136 and after step 069FS137, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the caller of this process.

In the ending effect selection second process, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current round is any of 13R to 15R (step 069FS141). If it is determined that any of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS141), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for controlling the ending effect selection reception display (step 069FS142).

When it is determined that the current round is neither 13R to 15R (NO in step 069FS141), and after step 069FS142, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect selection reception display is being displayed. (Step 069FS143). If it is determined that the display is in progress (YES in step 069FS143), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the ending effect type has been accepted (step 069FS144).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect is accepted (YES in step 069FS144), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted type of ending effect as the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS145).

If it is determined that the ending effect selection reception display is not displayed (NO in step 069FS143), it is determined that the selection of the ending effect type is not accepted (NO in step 069FS144), and after step 069FS145, the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current round is 16R (step 069FS146). When it is determined that the value is 16R (YES in step 069FS146), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for controlling the effect of notifying the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS147).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current round is not 16R (NO in step 069FS146) and after step 069FS147, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the caller of this process.

FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end post-processing executed in step S177 of FIG. 8-13. In the post-hit processing shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step S770), and determines whether or not the ending effect time timer value has become 0 (step S770). Step S771). That is, it is determined whether or not the ending effect time timer has timed out (whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed). When the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (step S771; NO), the ending effect execution process shown in FIG. 8-23, which will be described later, is executed (step S772), and the process after the jackpot ends is ended. When the ending effect time timer value becomes 0 (step S771; YES), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S773), and the jackpot ends. End the post-processing.

FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect execution process. With reference to FIG. 8-23, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step 069FS151). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time timer value has become 0 (step 069FS152).

When it is determined that the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (NO in step 069FS152), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start of the ending effect time (step 069FS153).

If it is determined that it is the start of the ending effect time (YES in step 069FS153), the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the set type of ending effect. (Step 069FS154).

If it is determined that it is not the start of the ending effect time (NO in step 069FS153), and after step 069FS154, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the ending effect being executed is an ending effect that accepts the player's selection. It is determined whether or not (step 069FS156). When it is determined that the ending effect accepts the player's selection (YES in step 069FS156), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection acceptance period in the ending effect is possible (step 069FS157).

When it is determined that the selection acceptance period (YES in step 069FS157), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection has been accepted (step 069FS158). If it is determined that the selection has been accepted (YES in step 069FS158), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content after the big hit (step 069FS159).

If it is determined that the ending effect does not accept the player's selection (NO in step 069FS156), and if it is determined that the selection acceptance period is not available (NO in step 069FS157), it is determined that the selection is not accepted (NO in step 069FS158). In the case and after step 069FS159, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the caller of the ending effect execution process.

FIG. 8-24 is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of selecting the type of ending effect. With reference to FIG. 8-24, in FIG. 8-24 (A), the current number of rounds when the jackpot is 13 to 15 rounds by executing the process shown in FIG. 8-20. In addition to the characters indicating the character indicating the total number of balls won in the jackpot, the image including the character prompting the player to select the type of effect at the ending, and the type of effect at the ending. An image including the characters of the choice is displayed on the image display device 5. When this screen is displayed, the player can select the type of effect at the ending by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. If the push button 31B is not operated before the end of the selectable period of 15 rounds, the type of the selected option is selected as the type of the effect at the ending.

Next, in FIG. 8-24 (A), by executing the process shown in FIG. 8-20, when the final 16 rounds of the jackpot are reached, the characters indicating the current number of rounds and the jackpot An image including characters indicating the type of the selected ending effect in addition to the characters indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls is displayed on the image display device 5.

FIG. 8-25 is a timing chart showing an example of the ending effect. With reference to FIGS. 8-25, FIG. 8-25 (A) shows a case where the ending effect of the effect pattern A is executed at the time of the first hit. At the time of the first hit, the effect pattern A is automatically selected. The effect pattern A is an effect pattern of an ending effect that selects the contents of the early stage, the middle stage, and the final stage of the effect content in the high base state after the big hit.

When the jackpot round ends and the ending effect time starts, first, an introduction effect indicating that the ending effect starts is executed in 2 seconds from the 0th second to the 2nd second. The next 5 seconds from the 2nd second to the 7th second is the selection period A for selecting the early stage production content among the production content after the big hit, and the production that accepts the selection of the early stage production content from the player. Is executed.

Similarly, for 5 seconds from the 7th second to the 12th second and 5 seconds from the 12th second to the 17th second, respectively, to select the production content in the middle stage and the final stage from the production content after the big hit, respectively. In the selection period B and the selection period C, respectively, the effects of accepting the selection of the effect contents in the middle stage and the final stage from the player are executed.

In the next 3 seconds from the 17th second to the 20th second, an effect of displaying the result selected in the selection period A to the selection period C is executed. In the 3 seconds from the 20th second to the 23rd second, an introduction effect indicating that the probability variation mode starts is executed. In 5 seconds from the 23rd second to the 28th second, a caution display including a display for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card and a display for preventing being absorbed in the game is displayed on the image display device 5. In 4 seconds from the 28th second to the 32nd second, the company logo indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the image display device 5. In 2 seconds from the last 32 seconds to the 34th second of the ending effect time, the probability variation mode entry effect indicating that the probability variation mode is entered is executed.

FIG. 8-25 (B) shows a case where the ending effect of the effect pattern A is executed at the time of continuous chan. At the time of consecutive chans, the player can select the type of ending effect to be executed during the ending effect time from the 13th round to the 16th round of the jackpot.

When the jackpot round ends and the ending effect time starts, first, an introduction effect indicating that the ending effect starts is executed in 2 seconds from the 0th second to the 2nd second. The next 10 seconds from the 2nd second to the 12th second is the selection period A for selecting the early stage production content from the production content after the big hit, and the production that accepts the selection of the early stage production content from the player. Is executed.

Similarly, the 10 seconds from the 12th second to the 22nd second and the 10 seconds from the 22nd to the 32nd second are for selecting the production contents in the middle stage and the final stage from the production contents after the big hit, respectively. In the selection period B and the selection period C, respectively, the effects of accepting the selection of the effect contents in the middle stage and the final stage from the player are executed.

In the next 5 seconds from the 32nd second to the 37th second, an effect of displaying the result selected in the selection period A to the selection period C is executed. In the 5 seconds from the 37th second to the 42nd second, an introduction effect indicating that the probability variation mode starts is executed. In 3 seconds from the last 42 seconds to the 45th second of the ending effect time, the probability variation mode entry effect indicating that the probability variation mode is entered is executed.

When the effect pattern E is selected from the effect pattern B, among the ending effects of the effect pattern A shown in FIGS. 8-25, the effect of the selection period A to the effect of the selection period C and the effect of displaying the selection result are displayed. The effects are changed from the effect pattern B to the effect pattern E. The length of the part with the player's intervention element included in the effect pattern A to the effect pattern E is different, but the ending effect time is equal to the length at which the jackpot symbol is displayed in the probability variation mode entry effect. Is adjusted to.

FIG. 8-26 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of the ending effect. When the effect pattern A is selected with reference to FIGS. 8-26, the screen shown in FIG. 8-26 (A) is displayed on the image display device 5 during the selection period A. The screen shown in FIG. 8-26 (A) includes an image including characters for prompting selection of the effect content in the early stage and characters indicating options among the effect contents after the big hit.

After the selection period A, the screens shown in FIGS. 8-26 (B) and (C) are displayed on the image display device 5 in the selection period B and the selection period C, respectively. The screens shown in FIGS. 8-26 (B) and (C) each include an image containing characters indicating the selection of the production contents in the middle stage and the final stage and characters indicating the options among the production contents after the big hit. Is done.

After the selection period C, the screen shown in FIG. 8-26 (D) is displayed on the image display device 5 during the selection result display period. The screen shown in FIG. 8-26 (D) includes an image including characters indicating the selection results of the early stage, the middle stage, and the final stage of the effect content after the big hit.

The effect pattern B can be output during a high base state after a big hit, depending on the result of the game, by executing a predetermined game (here, the Amidakuji game) that requires the player's operation (here, selection of options). This is an ending effect pattern that changes the number of songs that the player can select from among the various songs. When the effect pattern B is selected, FIGS. 8-26 (E) and 8-26 (F) are replaced with the effect of displaying the effect and the selection result of the selection period C from the selection period A shown in FIG. 8-25. ), The effect of executing the Amidakuji game is executed.

On the screen shown in FIG. 8-26 (E), the image of the first half of the Amidakuji, the characters of the choices at the start point of the Amidakuji, the characters urging the player to select the choices, and the characters following the path of the Amidakuji are displayed. Images are included. After the options are selected by the player and the image of the character starts to move along the path of the Amidakuji from the selected starting point, the screen of FIG. 8-26 (F) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 8-26 (F) includes an image of the latter half of the Amidakuji, characters showing the game result of the goal point of the Amidakuji, and an image of a character who has reached the goal point by following the path of the Amidakuji. .. Depending on the result of the game, the number of songs that can be output by the player during the high base state after the big hit can be changed. For example, as a result of the Amidakuji game, when the goal point of "add two songs" is reached, the number of songs that the player can select is added by two. When the goal point of "off" is reached, the number of songs that the player can select will be maintained as it is.

The total number of songs that can be output in the high base state stored in advance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 10. At the time of the first hit, two songs can be selected. After that, as a result of selecting the production pattern B in the ending production period of the jackpot of Ren Chan, the number of songs indicated by the result of the executed game is added. When the number of selectable songs reaches the total number of songs (10 songs in this case), the production pattern B becomes unselectable. After the effect pattern B becomes unselectable, the effect pattern E described later can be selected instead of the effect pattern B.

The effect pattern C is an ending that executes a predetermined game (here, a card game) that requires the player's operation (here, selection of an option), and suggests a setting value shown in a modified example based on the result of the game. It is a production pattern of production. If it is configured so that it can be set to one of the set values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value, it is set to the set value. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the situation. Since the player expects to be controlled in an advantageous state, the player can be drawn to the ending effect by executing the ending effect that suggests the set value. When the effect pattern C is selected, FIGS. 8-26 (G) and 8-26 (H) are used instead of the effect of the selection period C and the effect of displaying the selection result from the selection period A shown in FIG. 8-25. ), The effect of executing the card game is executed.

The screen shown in FIG. 8-26 (G) includes an image of the options of the playing card and characters for prompting the player to select the options. After the option is selected by the player and the operation of turning over the selected playing card is executed, the screen of FIG. 8-26 (H) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 8-26 (H) includes an image of a selection of playing cards that has not been selected, and an image of a playing card on which an image of the selected and turned over suggesting a setting value is drawn. .. Setting values are suggested according to the contents of the image of this playing card (for example, the contents of characters and the type of characters). For example, in the case of the character "may be set", it is suggested that the set value is likely to be a high set value. It also indicates that for a particular type of character, the set value is likely to be a high set value. It should be noted that the effect pattern C cannot be selected during the continuous chan when the setting suggestion is executed.

The effect pattern D is a mini-game that requires a player's operation to suggest whether or not there is a hold memory (so-called hold sequence) that is determined to be a big hit among the hold memories currently stored. It is a production pattern of the ending production that executes the production. When the effect pattern D is selected, the effect of executing the mini-game of the effect pattern D is executed instead of the effect of the selection period C and the effect of displaying the selection result from the selection period A shown in FIG. 8-25. ..

The effect pattern E is a selection pattern that can be selected after all the songs can be selected in the effect pattern B, or after the number of consecutive chans reaches a specific number of times (for example, 15 times), and the player can operate the effect pattern E. This is an effect pattern of an ending effect in which an image (for example, a premium image) that is not normally displayed is displayed when the game is successful as a result of executing a required predetermined mini-game. As shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), the options of the effect pattern E are displayed in the non-selectable state, but are displayed in a mode indicating that the selection is not possible, and the selectable state. After, it is displayed in a mode indicating that it can be selected.

(About the modified example of the feature part 069F)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 to 8-25, etc., the type of ending effect is before the ending effect during the big hit (for example, 13 rounds to 16 rounds). Made it selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of ending effect may be selected during the ending effect.

FIG. 8-27 is a timing chart showing an example of the ending effect in the modified example. With reference to FIGS. 8-27, in the above-described embodiment, the effect of selecting the effect pattern of the ending effect, which is executed before the ending effect during the big hit, is performed at the 0th second of the ending effect time. It should be executed in 10 seconds from to the 10th second. The effect to be executed after that is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 8-25 (B).

(2) In the first half period of the ending effect, the type of the effect executed in the latter half period may be selected as the related effect related to the effect executed in the second half period.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a related effect, an explanatory effect (for example, explanation of how to play) of an effect (for example, a mini game effect) executed in the latter half period may be executed, or the latter period period. Introducing the effect executed in (1) The effect may be executed. Further, in this case, in the shorter ending effect time, the first half period may not be provided and only the second half period may be used.

Further, in this case, if the same effect pattern is repeatedly selected during the big hit consecutive chan, the first half period may be shortened and the second half period may be lengthened. Further, the first half period may be shortened, the second half period may be the same length, and the time adjustment effect may be executed in the remaining period. As a result, the player can be illusioned that the ending period has been shortened.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), step S269 and step S270 in FIG. 8-6, and FIG. 8-7, the 16R probability variation jackpot is 6R. A longer time is selected as the fanfare production time at a higher rate than the probability variation jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot. In addition, the jackpot of Ren Chan selects a longer time as the fanfare production time at a higher rate than the jackpot of the first hit. In addition, when the jackpot is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, a longer time as the fanfare effect time is higher than when the jackpot is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. I tried to select with.

However, as described above, if the fanfare production time is determined, it may be determined by another method. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 100%. If the ratio of the latter is higher than the ratio of the former, it may be another ratio.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (B), steps S366 and S367 of FIGS. 8-10, and 8-11, the 16R probability variation jackpot is 6R. A longer time is selected as the ending production time at a higher rate than the probability variation jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot. In addition, the jackpot of Ren Chan selects a longer time as the ending production time at a higher rate than the jackpot of the first hit. In addition, when the jackpot is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, a longer time as the ending effect time is higher than when the jackpot is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. I tried to select with.

However, as described above, if the ending effect time is determined, it may be determined by another method. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 100%. If the ratio of the latter is higher than the ratio of the former, it may be another ratio.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the effect patterns A to the effect pattern E of the ending effect include an intervention element of the player (for example, an effect of causing the player to operate the operation unit). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of the production patterns may not include the intervention element of the player. For example, the effect pattern E is an effect pattern that does not include a mini-game that requires the operation of the player, and is an ending effect in which an image (for example, a premium image) that is not normally displayed is displayed without the operation of the player. It may be a production pattern.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, there is no limit to the number of consecutive probable change states. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a limit may be provided in which the number of consecutive probabilistic changes is set as a predetermined limit. In such a case, the effect pattern of the ending effect may include an effect pattern including a mini-game effect that suggests the remaining number of times up to a predetermined limit number of times in the probabilistic state.

(7) The effect in the high base state after the big hit may be a common effect in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether it is in the probabilistic state or the non-probable change state. In such a case, the effect pattern of the ending effect may include an effect pattern including a mini-game effect that suggests whether or not a probable change state will occur after a big hit.

(8) At the start of the ending effect time, the movable body 32 may be operated to perform an effect of appealing to the player the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit, and then the above-mentioned ending effect may be executed. .. As a result, the ending effect can be lengthened by the amount of the operating period of the movable body 32.

(9) In a special jackpot (for example, a jackpot when the number of consecutive chans reaches 20), a special image may be displayed without executing the ending effect described above. This special image may be displayed from the beginning of the big hit fanfare production period, may be displayed after the end of the fanfare production period, or may be displayed from the beginning of the ending production period. It may be. As described above, the ending effect described above may not be executed when a special condition is satisfied.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-11, it is assumed that the ending effect time is the same for the 6R normal jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot, and as shown in FIG. 8-25. , The ending effect of the same time allocation is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the 6R normal jackpot, the selection period of the effect after the jackpot may not be provided, and the ending effect time may be shorter than the 6R probability variation jackpot.

(11) In FIGS. 8-26 (A) to (C), options for the production content after the big hit are shown. Regarding this option, the 16R probability variation jackpot may have more options than the 6R probability variation jackpot. In addition, as the number of consecutive chans increases, the number of choices may increase. As shown in FIG. 8-25, at the time of 16R probability variation big hit or continuous chan, the selection period C is lengthened from the selection period A, so even if there are many choices, the player can choose from the choices after the big hit. It becomes easier to select the production content.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 069F)
(1-1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled by either (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) and
The end-time effect selection means (for example, the end-time effect selection means for selecting a longer period as the end-time effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11), and
End-time effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26) capable of executing end-time effect (for example, ending effect) during the end-time effect period. With and
The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state.
An end-time effect that can be accepted by the player from among a plurality of types of end-time effects that can be executed during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state, the end-time effect to be executed by the end-time effect execution means. The receiving means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Steps S752A in FIG. 8-19, steps 8-20, and 8-21. S784. The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the production period at the end or the second half of the jackpot round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, the 13R start command is received. It may be a period from the time of the operation until the end command of 16R is received.)

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select the end-time effect to be executed at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-2) It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a high state) different from the advantageous state is achieved. A gaming machine that can be controlled to the base state (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The normal state (for example, the normal state), the special state, the first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, the probability variation big hit) as the advantageous state, and the second advantageous state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, a 6-round jackpot, a normal jackpot), and
When controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state, rather than when controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the normal state (for example, in the case of a so-called first hit jackpot). (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive-chan jackpot), the end-time effect selection means (for example, the end-time effect selection means) for selecting a longer period as the end-time effect period (for example, the ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate. Game control microcomputer 100, steps S366 of FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11), and
End-time effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26) capable of executing end-time effect (for example, ending effect) during the end-time effect period. With and
The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state.
The end-time effect that can be accepted by the player from among a plurality of types of end-time effects that can be executed during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state, is selected by the end-time effect execution means. The receiving means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Steps S752A in FIG. 8-19, steps 8-20, and 8-21. S784.) Is further provided.

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select the end-time effect to be executed at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-3) As special identification information (for example, special symbol), first special identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information). For example, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, the advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit gaming state) can be controlled, and the special state different from the advantageous state (for example) after the end of the advantageous state (for example) For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and a high base state.
A first reserved storage means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage), and
A second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage), and
When both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 8-4) that is executed with priority over display.
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled by either (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) and
The advantageous state is controlled in the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, as compared with the case where the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. Ending effect selection means for selecting a long period as the ending effect period (for example, ending effect time) at a high rate (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8- 11) and
End-time effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26) capable of executing end-time effect (for example, ending effect) during the end-time effect period. With and
The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state.
The end-time effect that can be accepted by the player from among a plurality of types of end-time effects that can be executed during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state, is selected by the end-time effect execution means. The receiving means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Steps S752A in FIG. 8-19, steps 8-20, and 8-21. S784.) Is further provided.

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select the end-time effect to be executed at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled by either (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) and
The end-time effect selection means (for example, a game control microcomputer) in which the first advantageous state selects a longer period as the end-time effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than the second advantageous state. 100, step S366 of FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11),
An end-time effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26) capable of executing the end-time effect during the end-time effect period is provided.
The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state.
Each of the plurality of types of end-time effects that can be performed during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state includes player intervention elements (for example, operations of the stick controller 31A and push button 31B) (for example, an effect pattern). Each of A to the effect pattern E is an effect mode that accepts the operation of the player).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player's intervention element is included in the end-time effect executed in the end-time effect period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-2) It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a high state) different from the advantageous state is achieved. A gaming machine that can be controlled to the base state (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
It is possible to control at least one of a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, and as the advantageous state, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) and
When controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state, rather than when controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the normal state (for example, in the case of a so-called first hit jackpot). (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive-chan jackpot), the end-time effect selection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a longer period as the end-time effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate). Step S366 of FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11),
An end-time effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26) capable of executing the end-time effect during the end-time effect period is provided.
The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state.
Each of the plurality of types of end-time effects that can be performed during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state includes player intervention elements (for example, operations of the stick controller 31A and push button 31B) (for example, an effect pattern). Each of A to the effect pattern E is an effect mode that accepts the operation of the player).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player's intervention element is included in the end-time effect executed in the end-time effect period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-3) As special identification information (for example, special symbol), first special identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information). For example, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, the advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit gaming state) can be controlled, and the special state different from the advantageous state (for example) after the end of the advantageous state (for example) For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and a high base state.
A first reserved storage means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage), and
A second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage), and
When both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B) that is executed with priority over display,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. When,
The advantageous state is controlled in the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, as compared with the case where the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End-time effect selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, steps S366 of FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11) for selecting a long period as the end-time effect period at the end of
An end-time effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26) capable of executing the end-time effect during the end-time effect period is provided.
The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state.
Each of the plurality of types of end-time effects that can be performed during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state includes player intervention elements (for example, operations of the stick controller 31A and push button 31B) (for example, an effect pattern). Each of A to the effect pattern E is an effect mode that accepts the operation of the player).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player's intervention element is included in the end-time effect executed in the end-time effect period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-3-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled by either (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) and
The end-time effect selection means (for example, a game control microcomputer) in which the first advantageous state selects a longer period as the end-time effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than the second advantageous state. 100, step S366 of FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11),
With the end-time effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26), which can execute the end-time effect during the end-time effect period.
Post-end effect reception that accepts the selection of the effect content from a plurality of types of the effect content from the player during the selection period during which the effect content after the end of the end effect period can be selected. Means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B; another operation unit for setting may be used; steps 069FS156 to 069FS159 in FIGS. 8-23) are provided.
The selection period of the end-time effect period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the end-time effect period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, 6R. The 16R probabilistic jackpot has a longer selection period for the production after the jackpot ends than the probabilistic jackpot.)

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, since the selection period of the production content after the end of the production period at the end is lengthened, it becomes easier to recognize the production content, and it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-2) It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a high state) different from the advantageous state A gaming machine that can be controlled to the base state (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
It is possible to control at least one of a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, and as the advantageous state, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) and
When controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state, rather than when controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the normal state (for example, in the case of a so-called first hit jackpot). (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive-chan jackpot), the end-time effect selection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a longer period as the end-time effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate). Step S366 of FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11),
With the end-time effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26), which can execute the end-time effect during the end-time effect period.
Post-end effect reception that accepts the selection of the effect content from a plurality of types of the effect content from the player during the selection period during which the effect content after the end of the end effect period can be selected. Means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B; another operation unit for setting may be used; steps 069FS156 to 069FS159 in FIGS. 8-23) are provided.
The selection period of the end-time effect period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the end-time effect period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, 6R. The 16R probabilistic jackpot has a longer selection period for the production after the jackpot ends than the probabilistic jackpot.)

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, since the selection period of the production content after the end of the production period at the end is lengthened, it becomes easier to recognize the production content, and it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-3) The first special identification information (for example, the first special symbol) as the special identification information (for example, the special symbol) and the second special identification information (for example, the second special identification information which is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information). For example, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, the advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit gaming state) can be controlled, and the special state different from the advantageous state (for example) after the end of the advantageous state (for example) For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and a high base state.
A first reserved storage means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage), and
A second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage), and
When both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B) that is executed with priority over display,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. When,
The advantageous state is controlled in the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, as compared with the case where the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End-time effect selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, steps S366 of FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11) for selecting a long period as the end-time effect period at the end of
With the end-time effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26), which can execute the end-time effect during the end-time effect period.
Post-end effect reception that accepts the selection of the effect content from a plurality of types of the effect content from the player during the selection period during which the effect content after the end of the end effect period can be selected. Means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B; another operation unit for setting may be used; steps 069FS156 to 069FS159 in FIGS. 8-23) are provided.
The selection period of the end-time effect period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the end-time effect period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, 6R. The 16R probabilistic jackpot has a longer selection period for the production after the jackpot ends than the probabilistic jackpot.)

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, since the selection period of the production content after the end of the production period at the end is lengthened, it becomes easier to recognize the production content, and it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-4) In any of the game machines (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
Further provided with motion detecting means for detecting motion by the player (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 in FIG. 8-23).
Regardless of which of the plurality of types of end-time effects is executed, the end-time effect executing means executes the operation as an intervention element in an effect mode in which motion detection by the motion detection means is required during the execution period (. For example, each of the effect patterns A to the effect pattern E is an effect mode that accepts the operation of the player).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the presence of the intervention element by the player.

(1-5) In any of the game machines (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
Further provided with motion detecting means for detecting motion by the player (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 in FIG. 8-23).
The end-time effect executing means executes the end-time effect as an intervention element in either an effect mode in which the motion detection means needs to detect the motion during the execution period or an effect mode in which the detection is not necessary (for example,). , One of the effect patterns A to the effect pattern E may be an effect mode that does not accept the operation of the player).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the presence of the intervention element by the player.

(1-6) In any of the game machines (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. )
(From among a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to effect patterns E) that can be executed during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state, the end-time effect executed by the end-time effect execution means. The end-time effect receiving means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the stick controller 31A, and the push button 31B; which may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A of FIG. 8-19, FIG. 8-20, step S784 of FIG. 8-21.)
When a plurality of types of end-time effects are selected by the end-time effect reception means a predetermined number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times), until the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, so-called continuous chan). Includes an end-time effect that makes it impossible to accept selections (for example, if all songs are released, the effect pattern B is not selectable during consecutive chans). ..

According to such a configuration, diversity is created in the production, and it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of delay.

(1-7) In any of the game machines (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. )
(End-time effect reception that accepts from the player the selection of the end-time effect to be executed by the end-time effect executing means from among a plurality of types of end-time effects that can be executed in the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. Means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B. Other operation units for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, step S784 in FIGS. 8-20, 8-21. .) With more,)
In the multiple types of end-time effects, when the effect result is a specific result (for example, success), selection is accepted until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the so-called consecutive chan ends). Includes an end-time effect that is disabled (for example, effect pattern C cannot be selected during consecutive chans when the setting suggestion is executed).

According to such a configuration, diversity is created in the production, and it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of delay.

(1-8) In the game machine of (1-6) or (1-7) above
(The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. )
(End-time effect reception that accepts from the player the selection of the end-time effect to be executed by the end-time effect executing means from among a plurality of types of end-time effects that can be executed in the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. Means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B. Other operation units for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, step S784 in FIGS. 8-20, 8-21. .) With more,)
The plurality of types of end-time effects include an end-time effect in which selections can be newly accepted instead of the end-time effects in which selections cannot be accepted (for example, the effect pattern E is the effect pattern B or When the effect pattern C cannot be selected, it can be selected.)

According to such a configuration, diversity is created in the production, and it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of delay.

(1-9) In any of the game machines (1-1-1) to (1-8) above,
(The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E) during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. )
(End-time effect reception that accepts from the player the selection of the end-time effect to be executed by the end-time effect executing means from among a plurality of types of end-time effects that can be executed in the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. Means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B. Other operation units for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, step S784 in FIGS. 8-20, 8-21. .) With more,)
Multiple types of end-time effects can be selected based on the fulfillment of release conditions (for example, the condition that other effect patterns cannot be selected, the condition that consecutive chans have ended). Includes end-of-life production. Before the start of the selection period in which the selection of the effect at the end can be accepted, or during the selection period, the player's special operation (for example, back button operation or command input, specifically, a cross) The release condition may be satisfied according to the operation of the keys in a predetermined order, the repeated pressing of the push button, the password input, etc.

According to such a configuration, diversity is created in the production, and it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of delay.

(1-10) In any of the game machines (1-1-1) to (1-9) above,
(The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E)).
Further provided with a setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages having different advantages for the player.
The plurality of types of end-time effects include an effect that suggests the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (H), the effect pattern C suggests a set value. It is a production.)

According to such a configuration, diversity is created in the production, and it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of delay.

(1-11) In any of the game machines (1-1-1) to (1-10) above,
(The end-time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect patterns A to E)).
The plurality of types of end effects include end effects having different lengths (for example, the effect patterns A to E have different lengths).
The next variable after the execution of the end effect is completed so that the period from the start of the execution of the end effect by the end effect execution means to the start of the next variable display is the same. The period adjustment effect until the display is started is executed (for example, the ending effect period is set to be longer than the effect patterns A to E, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the extra time).

According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the period from the start of the execution of the effect at the end to the start of the next variable display, and the game control can be easily executed.

(1-12) In any of the game machines (1-1-1) to (1-11) above,
The end-time production period includes at least a first period and a second period after the lapse of the first period.
In the first period, related effects (for example, introduction effect, explanatory effect, effect mode selection effect) related to the effect executed in the second period are executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, ending). During the effect time, an effect pattern selection period for selecting the effect pattern to be executed after that may be provided).

According to such a configuration, diversity is created in the production, and it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of delay.

(2-1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled by either (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) and
The start-time effect selection means (for example, the start-time effect selection means for selecting a longer period as the start-time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-7),
In the notification period (for example, the notification effect period), which is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start effect period. Among, the notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing the notification effect for notifying the type of the effect in the advantageous state that can be executed.
Advantageous state effect receiving means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B; other operation unit for setting, which allows the player to receive the selection of the advantageous state effect from a plurality of types. It may be provided with (step 069FS123 to step 069FS126) of FIG. 8-16.
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the 16R probability variation jackpot is a notification effect rather than the 6R probability variation jackpot. Long run),
The notification effect executing means is
In the second advantageous state notification period, the type of the advantageous state effect that can be executed after the end of the start effect period is notified in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17). In addition, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot, and in the case of promotion from a 6R normal jackpot to a 6R probability variation jackpot, the notification effect is executed in a manner that the player cannot select.)
In the first advantageous state notification period, the player notifies in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state effects to be executed after the end of the start time effect period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17). In the case of the 6R probability variation jackpot and the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the notification effect of notifying the selected music is executed because the selection of which jackpot music to output is accepted. ).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-2) It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a high state) different from the advantageous state is achieved. A gaming machine that can be controlled to the base state (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The normal state (for example, the normal state), the special state, the first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, the probability variation big hit) as the advantageous state, and the second advantageous state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, a 6-round jackpot, a normal jackpot), and
When controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state, rather than when controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the normal state (for example, in the case of a so-called first hit jackpot). (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive-chan jackpot), a start-time effect selection means (for example, a start-time effect selection means) that selects a longer period as a start-time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state at a higher rate. Game control microcomputer 100, steps S269 of FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-7),
In the notification period (for example, the notification effect period), which is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start effect period. Among, the notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing the notification effect for notifying the type of the effect in the advantageous state that can be executed.
Advantageous state effect receiving means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B; other operation unit for setting, which allows the player to receive the selection of the advantageous state effect from a plurality of types. It may be provided with (step 069FS123 to step 069FS126) of FIG. 8-16.
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the 16R probability variation jackpot is a notification effect rather than the 6R probability variation jackpot. Long run),
The notification effect executing means is
In the second advantageous state notification period, the type of the advantageous state effect that can be executed after the end of the start effect period is notified in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17). In addition, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot, and in the case of promotion from a 6R normal jackpot to a 6R probability variation jackpot, the notification effect is executed in a manner that the player cannot select.)
In the first advantageous state notification period, the player notifies in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state effects to be executed after the end of the start time effect period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17). In the case of the 6R probability variation jackpot and the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the notification effect of notifying the selected music is executed because the selection of which jackpot music to output is accepted. ).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-3) As special identification information (for example, special symbol), first special identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information). For example, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, the advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, the jackpot gaming state) can be controlled, and the special state different from the advantageous state (for example) after the end of the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state). For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and a high base state.
A first reserved storage means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage), and
A second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage), and
When both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 8-4) that is executed with priority over display.
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled by either (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) and
The advantageous state is controlled in the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, as compared with the case where the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. Start-time effect selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-] for selecting a long period as a start-time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at a high rate. 7) and
In the notification period (for example, the notification effect period), which is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start effect period. Among, the notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing the notification effect for notifying the type of the effect in the advantageous state that can be executed.
Advantageous state effect receiving means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B; other operation unit for setting, which allows the player to receive the selection of the advantageous state effect from a plurality of types. It may be provided with (step 069FS123 to step 069FS126) of FIG. 8-16.
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the 16R probability variation jackpot is a notification effect rather than the 6R probability variation jackpot. Long run),
The notification effect executing means is
In the second advantageous state notification period, the type of the advantageous state effect that can be executed after the end of the start effect period is notified in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17). In addition, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot, and in the case of promotion from a 6R normal jackpot to a 6R probability variation jackpot, the notification effect is executed in a manner that the player cannot select.)
In the first advantageous state notification period, the player notifies in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state effects to be executed after the end of the start time effect period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17). In the case of the 6R probability variation jackpot and the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the notification effect of notifying the selected music is executed because the selection of which jackpot music to output is accepted. ).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled by either (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) and
The start-time effect selection means (for example, the start-time effect selection means for selecting a longer period as the start-time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-7),
In the notification period (for example, the notification effect period), which is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start effect period. Among, the notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing the notification effect for notifying the type of the effect in the advantageous state that can be executed.
Advantageous state effect receiving means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B; other operation unit for setting, which allows the player to receive the selection of the advantageous state effect from a plurality of types. It may be provided with (step 069FS123 to step 069FS126) of FIG. 8-16.
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the 16R probability variation jackpot is a notification effect rather than the 6R probability variation jackpot. For a long time to execute).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-2) It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a high state) different from the advantageous state A gaming machine that can be controlled to the base state (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The normal state (for example, the normal state), the special state, the first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, the probability variation big hit) as the advantageous state, and the second advantageous state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, a 6-round jackpot, a normal jackpot), and
When controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state, rather than when controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the normal state (for example, in the case of a so-called first hit jackpot). (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive-chan jackpot), a start-time effect selection means (for example, a start-time effect selection means) that selects a longer period as a start-time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state at a higher rate. Game control microcomputer 100, steps S269 of FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-7),
In the notification period (for example, the notification effect period), which is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start effect period. Among, the notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing the notification effect for notifying the type of the effect in the advantageous state that can be executed.
Advantageous state effect receiving means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B; other operation unit for setting, which allows the player to receive the selection of the advantageous state effect from a plurality of types. It may be provided with (step 069FS123 to step 069FS126) of FIG. 8-16.
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the 16R probability variation jackpot is a notification effect rather than the 6R probability variation jackpot. For a long time to execute).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-3) As special identification information (for example, special symbol), first special identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information). For example, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, the advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit gaming state) can be controlled, and the special state different from the advantageous state (for example) after the end of the advantageous state (for example) For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and a high base state.
A first reserved storage means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage), and
A second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage), and
When both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 8-4) that is executed with priority over display.
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled by either (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) and
The advantageous state is controlled in the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, as compared with the case where the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. Start-time effect selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-] for selecting a long period as a start-time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at a high rate. 7) and
In the notification period (for example, the notification effect period), which is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start effect period. Among, the notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing the notification effect for notifying the type of the effect in the advantageous state that can be executed.
Advantageous state effect receiving means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B; other operation unit for setting, which allows the player to receive the selection of the advantageous state effect from a plurality of types. It may be provided with (step 069FS123 to step 069FS126) of FIG. 8-16.
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the 16R probability variation jackpot is a notification effect rather than the 6R probability variation jackpot. For a long time to execute).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-4) In any of the game machines (2-1-1) to (2-2-3) above,
In the first advantageous state, there are more types of effects during the advantageous state that can be executed than in the second advantageous state (for example, in the 6R normal jackpot, it is possible to output the music at the time of the jackpot from three songs. In the 16R probability variation jackpot, you can select the song at the time of the jackpot from 10 songs).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-5) In any of the game machines (2-1-1) to (2-4) above,
In the first advantageous state, by the effect receiving means during the advantageous state, based on the increase in the number of times continuously controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the so-called continuous chan number) while being controlled to the special state. There are many types of effects during the advantageous state that can accept selection (for example, a selectable jackpot song is added for each consecutive chan).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-6) In any of the game machines (2-1-1) to (2-5) above,
As the first advantageous state, there are a first A advantageous state (for example, 16 round probability variation jackpot) and a first B advantageous state (for example, 6 round probability variation jackpot) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first A advantageous state.
The notification period of the 1A advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the 1B advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the 16R probability variation jackpot is a notification effect rather than the 6R probability variation jackpot. The period is long.).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-7) In any of the game machines (2-1-1) to (2-6) above,
The notification effect executing means is used as the notification effect.
In the case of the second advantageous state, as the effect during the advantageous state, the type of effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is present is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the jackpot type. The notification effect and the round promotion effect are executed as the notification effect.) On the other hand.
In the first advantageous state, the notification of the type of music that can be output as the effect during the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the music selection effect is executed as the notification effect).

According to such a configuration, since the period controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, the game value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of prolongation due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-8) In any of the game machines (2-1-1) to (2-7) above,
The start-time effect period includes an advantageous state type suggestion period (for example, a period of jackpot type suggestion display shown in FIG. 8-17) for executing an effect suggesting the type of advantageous state.
The advantageous state type suggestion period of the first advantageous state is longer than the advantageous state type suggestion period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the 16R probability variation jackpot is longer. The period of jackpot type suggestion display is longer than other jackpots.)

With such a configuration, the player is notified for a longer period of time that the player is in a more favorable and advantageous state. For this reason, the player can be pleased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Explanation of Feature 104F of this Embodiment)
Conventionally, there has been a game machine in which a jackpot that is advantageous to a player is set to have a longer fanfare period in which a fanfare effect of a jackpot is executed than a jackpot that is disadvantageous (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-148). See publication). In this way, if the fanfare period is lengthened, the interval between the jackpot and the next jackpot becomes longer, the prize balls given to the player per unit period can be reduced, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be suppressed.

However, if the advantageous jackpot fanfare period is simply set longer, the player will see a long fanfare effect for each advantageous jackpot. For this reason, even if it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high, there is a risk that the interest of the game will decline. The gaming machines according to the inventions 104F and 105F that solve such a problem will be described below. In the following, the features of the gaming machine according to the inventions 104F and 105F will be referred to as the feature section 104F. The feature unit 104F is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. In the following, the differences from the above-mentioned feature unit 069F will be described.

FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing a determination example of a special figure display result and the like. As shown in FIG. 8-5 described above, in the feature unit 069F, the jackpot for the first special figure is set to two types, and the jackpot for the second special figure is set to one type. With reference to FIG. 9-1, in the feature unit 104F, there are two types of jackpots for the first special figure, the first jackpot and the second jackpot, and the jackpot for the second special figure is 4 from the third jackpot to the sixth jackpot. Type.

As described with reference to FIG. 8-5, the number of rounds of the jackpot and whether it is controlled to the probabilistic state or the normal state that is not the probabilistic state after the jackpot differs depending on the jackpot type. The number of prize balls for each game ball that has won the big prize opening is constant, and the maximum number of game balls that can be won in the big prize opening per round is almost constant. The number of prize balls obtained by the final round increases as the number of jackpot rounds increases.

The first jackpot and the third jackpot of this embodiment are jackpots (four rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is small and the normal state is easily controlled after the jackpot ends. The second jackpot and the fifth jackpot are jackpots (four-round probability variation jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is small and the probability variation state is easily controlled after the jackpot ends. The fourth jackpot is a jackpot (16 rounds normal jackpot) that has a large number of rounds of jackpot and is easily controlled to a normal state after the jackpot ends. The sixth jackpot is a jackpot (16 rounds probability variation jackpot) that has a large number of rounds of jackpot and is easily controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the jackpot symbol and the determination ratio are predetermined for each jackpot type.

In the feature unit 069F, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the jackpot probability in the non-probability change state (normal state) is 1/300, and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is 4/300 (= 1/75). .. In the feature unit 104F, the jackpot probability in the non-probability change state (normal state) is 1/300, and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is 1/50. Further, in the feature unit 069F, an upper limit number of times is set for the probability variation number, but in the feature part 104F, this upper limit number of times is assumed to be 100 fluctuation display times. In the probabilistic state, it is also controlled in the time saving state. Even if the probability change state does not occur after the big hit state, it is controlled to the time saving state. In each of the time saving states, after the big hit, the fluctuation display is continued up to 100 times.

In the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened at a high rate, so that the player hits the game ball into the area on the right side of the game board 2 shown in FIG. 8-1. Therefore, the variable display of the second special figure is executed by the start winning of the variable winning ball device 6B to the second starting winning opening. In the variable display of the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the 16-round probability variation jackpot (sixth jackpot) is determined at a higher rate than the other jackpots. As a result, when controlled to the time saving state, it is controlled to 16 round probability variation jackpot at a higher rate than other jackpots.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. This fluctuation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of FIG. 8-3. With reference to FIG. 9-2, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S250). When the jackpot flag is set (step S250; YES), the transmission setting of the effect control command (display result designation command) according to the jackpot type (first jackpot to sixth jackpot) is set (step S251). If the jackpot flag is not set (step S250; NO), the transmission setting of the effect control command (display result designation command) indicating that the game is lost is set (step S252).

After executing the process of step S251 or the process of step S251, the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the special figure display result (step S253). In the process of step S253, a variation pattern determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101 or the like is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns depending on whether or not the special figure display result is a big hit. I just need to be there. The CPU 103 may determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is any one of a plurality of types, depending on whether or not the special figure display result is a big hit and the number of reserved memories. It may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern of.

Following the process of step S253, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the effect control command (variation pattern designation command) according to the determined variation pattern (step S254). In addition to the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a first variation start command (or a second variation start command that specifies the start of the second special figure game) that specifies the start of the first special figure game. May be done. Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time timer value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 (step S256), and sets the value of the special figure process flag. Is updated to "2" corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S256), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S256, the special symbol variation process is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

FIG. 9-3 is a diagram illustrating a fluctuation pattern at the time of low accuracy and low base. FIG. 9-4 is a diagram illustrating a fluctuation pattern at the time of high accuracy and high base. FIG. 9-5 is a diagram illustrating a fluctuation pattern at the time of low accuracy and high base. With reference to FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, in this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and the case where "non-reach" is used. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of "reach" and to the case where the variable display result is "big hit".

The variable display mode of the decorative symbol varies with respect to the decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination. Is in a continuous display state, or in a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination, so that "reach" is achieved. As a specific example, in a part of the decorative symbol display area of "left", "middle", and "right", when the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, they are still stopped. In the remaining decorative symbol display area that is not displayed, the decorative symbol is in a fluctuating state, or in all or part of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas, the decorative symbols are a big hit combination. It is a display state in which all or part of the display changes in synchronization. Further, in response to the reach state, a character image different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, and the variation mode of the decorative symbol is changed. It may cause you to do it. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect display. The variable display mode of the decorative pattern that does not become "reach" is called "non-reach".

Regarding the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, a fluctuation pattern having a longer variable display time is selected at a higher rate in the jackpot with a higher expected value of the prize ball obtained than in a jackpot with a lower expected value. The selection ratio is set in advance so as to be. As a result, the period from the display of the unconfirmed combination of jackpot symbols to the start of the first round of jackpot is longer for jackpots with a high expected value of the prize balls to be obtained than for jackpots with a low expected value. For example, the variation patterns PB5-4 to PB5-6, PB5-7, PB5-8, in which the 16-round probability variation jackpot and the 16-round normal jackpot have a longer variable display time than the 4-round probability variation jackpot and the 4-round normal jackpot, PB5-14 and PB5-17 are preset so as to be selected at a high rate. The "long variable display time" may be, for example, a time equal to or longer than the minimum time required for digesting the jackpot that can obtain the most prize balls, and the numerator of the jackpot probability is 1 in the shortened fluctuation during the time saving state. It may be the same number of times as the number of denominators when, and the time required for the variable display when the variable display is displayed may be longer than the time required, or may be approximately 100 seconds or longer.

FIG. 9-6 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. This variable display start setting process is executed in step S171 of FIG. 8-13. With reference to FIG. 9-6 (A), in the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) based on the special symbol display result (step S701). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether the special figure display result is a big hit or a loss by reading the EXT data in the display result designation command. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the fluctuation pattern (step S702). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold digestion process (step S703). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the decorative symbol variation time timer value according to the variation pattern in the decorative symbol variation time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control timer setting unit or the like) (step). S704), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step S705), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 9-6 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display. This variable display effect process is executed in step S172 of FIG. 8-13. With reference to FIG. 9-6 (B), in the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the decorative symbol variation time timer value (step S710), and the decorative symbol variation time timer value is 0. It is determined whether or not the result is (step S711). When the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer value is not 0 (step S711; NO), the variable display in-process effect processing is terminated. When the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer value becomes 0 (step S711; YES), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step S712) and is variable. Ends the display processing. During the period until the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer value becomes 0, various effects such as variable display of the decorative symbol are executed.

FIG. 9-7 is a first timing chart showing an example of the effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of the jackpot. When it is decided to make a 16-round probability variation jackpot in the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy low-base state, the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 9-4 (B) or 9-5 (B), respectively. The fluctuation pattern is determined from us.

When the variation pattern PB5-4 is determined with reference to FIG. 9-7 (A), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started at the time Ta1, and the time Ta2 is reached after the 20-second pre-reach period. , Reach (for example, the reach of the jackpot symbol "6" corresponding to the 16-round normal jackpot), and the production of the super reach γ is started. After that, when the time Ta3 is reached after a reach period of 30 seconds, the combination of the jackpot symbol "6" is derived and displayed. After that, the promotion effect is executed in the undetermined period of the jackpot symbol for 40 seconds, and after the success result is reached, when the time Ta4 is reached, the combination of the confirmed jackpot symbol "7" is derived and displayed. After that, when the time Ta5 is reached after a 0.5-second jackpot symbol determination period, the jackpot gaming state of the 16-round probability variation jackpot is started. After that, after the fanfare effect is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Ta6 is reached, the first round of the big hit is started and the big winning opening is opened.

FIG. 9-8 is a first screen transition diagram showing the flow of the effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) with reference to FIG. 9-8, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern PB5-4, the variation of the decorative symbol is performed at the times Ta1 to Ta2. The display is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), at time Ta2, the variation display of the decorative symbol reaches the symbol of “6” and is moved to the upper right portion of the image display device 5. At times Ta2 to Ta3, the reduced decorative symbol variation display is continued in the symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and the super reach γ effect (for example, a girl and a monster) is produced in the central part of the image display device 5. The production of a battle) is executed.

The result is an aspect that is advantageous to the player in the production of the super reach γ (for example, the result that the girl wins the monster), and as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C), at the time Ta3, the reach symbol “6” The combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in an undetermined state (for example, a shaking display state). After that, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), at times Ta3 to Ta4, the unconfirmed combination of jackpot symbols of "6" is moved to the upper right part of the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 In the central part of, a promotion effect indicating whether or not to promote to a symbol corresponding to a jackpot advantageous to the player (here, 16 round probability variation jackpot) (for example, operation of an operation unit such as push button 31B (continuous hit operation)) By displaying a button display to urge the player, or by operating it, it becomes a jackpot symbol of "7", and by displaying characters suggesting that it may be promoted to a probabilistic jackpot, or by displaying a character. A production that suggests to the player that the player is in a promising state) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (E), 16 rounds until the time Ta5 after the operation by the player between the times Ta3 and Ta4 or after the time Ta4 when the undetermined period has elapsed. The combination of the jackpot symbols of "7" as the definite display corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When operated by the player, the movable body 32 is operated once before the combination of jackpot symbols is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (F), the jackpot game state of the 16-round probability variation jackpot is started from the time Ta5. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (G), during the fanfare period of the jackpot at times Ta5 to Ta6, the player accepts the selection of the music output during the jackpot. The player operates an operation unit such as the stick controller 31A to move a display indicating that it is a selection candidate (here, a frame display surrounding characters) and operates an operation unit such as the push button 31B. , The selection candidate music is confirmed as the music to be output. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (H), the first round of the jackpot starts from the time Ta6.

Returning to FIG. 9-7 and referring to FIG. 9-7 (B), when the variation pattern PB5-5 is determined, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started at time Tb1 and the pre-reach period of 20 seconds is set. After that, when the time Tb2 is reached, the reach of the jackpot symbol "7" corresponding to the 16-round probability variation jackpot is reached, and the production of super reach γ is started. After that, when the time Tb3 is reached after a reach period of 10 seconds, the combination of the jackpot symbol "7" is derived and displayed. After that, after the pre-fanfare effect is executed in the undetermined period of the jackpot symbol for 60 seconds, when the time Tb4 is reached, the combination of the confirmed jackpot symbol "7" is derived and displayed. After that, when the time Tb5 is reached after a 0.5-second jackpot symbol determination period, the jackpot gaming state of the 16-round probability variation jackpot is started. After that, after the fanfare effect is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Tb6 is reached, the first round of the jackpot is started and the jackpot is opened.

FIG. 9-9 is a second screen transition diagram showing the flow of the effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of the jackpot. With reference to FIG. 9-9, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the variation pattern PB5-5, at times Tb1 to Tb2, FIG. 9-8. The same display as in (A) is executed by the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), at time Tb2, the variation display of the decorative symbol reaches the symbol of “7” and is moved to the upper right portion of the image display device 5. At times Tb2 to Tb3, the reduced decorative symbol variation display is continued in the symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and the super reach γ effect (for example, a girl and a monster) is produced in the central part of the image display device 5. The production of a battle) is executed.

The result is an aspect that is advantageous to the player in the production of the super reach γ (for example, the result that the girl wins the monster), and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), at the time Tb3, the reach symbol “7” The combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in an undetermined state (for example, a shaking display state). After that, after the first operation of the movable body 32 is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), at times Tb3 to Tb4, the combination of the undetermined jackpot symbols of "7" is an image display device. A pre-fanfare production (for example, FIG. 9-9 (for example, FIG. 9-9) indicating that the jackpot is moved to the upper right part of 5 and becomes a jackpot advantageous to the player (here, a 16-round probability variation jackpot) at the center of the image display device 5. An effect similar to the fanfare effect shown in F) is executed.

Then, the player is urged to operate the operation unit such as the push button 31B once, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), at the times Tb4 to Tb5, the "confirmed display corresponding to the 16-round probability variation jackpot" is displayed. The combination of the jackpot symbols of "7" is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When the operation is performed by the player, the movable body 32 performs the second operation before the combination of the jackpot symbols of "7" is displayed. Subsequent FIGS. 9-9 (F) to (H) are the same as those in FIGS. 9-8 (F) to (H).

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7, and 9-8 and 9-9, the execution period of the promotion effect described in 9-8 (D) (in this embodiment). , 70.5 seconds), the execution period of the pre-fanfare effect (90.5 seconds in this embodiment) described in FIG. 9-9 (D) is longer. The fanfare period may also be lengthened. In addition, the reach period may be included or lengthened.

Further, when the pre-fanfare effect described in FIG. 9-9 is executed, the movable body 32 is operated twice, while when the promotion effect described in FIG. 9-8 is executed, the movable body 32 is operated once. Let me. As described above, when the pre-fanfare effect is executed, it is easier to operate the movable body 32 as compared with the case where the promotion effect is executed.

Further, when the pre-fanfare effect described in FIG. 9-9 is executed, the player is urged to perform one operation, while when the promotion effect described in FIG. 9-8 is executed, the player is urged to perform a continuous striking operation. To do so. As described above, when the pre-fanfare effect is executed, the number of times the effect that encourages the movement by the player is executed is smaller than that when the promotion effect is executed. Since the promotion production is where the player wants to be promoted to a probabilistic jackpot, he is forced to perform a continuous hit operation, but in the pre-fanfare production, the production proceeds with the player informed that it is an advantageous jackpot. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will not actively operate even if the operation is urged, and in order to slowly show a special effect as a winning run time, the player is not required to operate, or a small number of operations are performed. Make a request.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, only when it is decided to make a 16-round probability variation jackpot, the "7" symbol is reached. To do. As a result, when the "7" symbol reaches, the effect can be executed so that the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player is higher than when the reach is achieved with other symbols (). Here, the big hit is confirmed).

Returning to FIG. 9-7, when it is decided to make a 16-round normal jackpot in the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy low-base state, FIGS. 9-4 (C) or 9-5 (Fig. 9-5), respectively. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns shown in C).

When the variation pattern PB5-7 is determined with reference to FIG. 9-7 (C), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started at the time Tc1 and the time Tc2 is reached after the 20-second pre-reach period. , Reach (for example, the reach of the jackpot symbol "6" corresponding to the 16-round normal jackpot), and the production of the super reach γ is started. After that, when the time Tc3 is reached after a reach period of 30 seconds, the combination of the jackpot symbol "6" is derived and displayed. After that, the promotion effect is executed in the undetermined period of the jackpot symbol for 40 seconds, and after the failure result, when the time Tc4 is reached, the combination of the confirmed jackpot symbol "6" is derived and displayed. After that, when the time Tc5 is reached after a 0.5-second jackpot symbol determination period, the 16-round normal jackpot jackpot game state is started. After that, after the fanfare effect is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Tc6 is reached, the first round of the jackpot is started and the jackpot is opened.

FIG. 9-10 is a third screen transition diagram showing the flow of the effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of the jackpot. With reference to FIG. 9-10, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), when the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the variation pattern PB5-7, at time Tc1 to Tc2, FIG. 9-8. The same display as in (A) is executed by the image display device 5. After that, in FIGS. 9-10 (B) to 9 (D), the same display as in FIGS. 9-8 (B) to (D) is executed by the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), 16 rounds are performed until the time Tc5 after the operation by the player between the times Tc3 and Tc4 or after the time Tc4 after the undetermined period has elapsed. The combination of the jackpot symbols of "6" as the final display corresponding to the normal jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (F), the jackpot game state of the 16-round normal jackpot is started from the time Tc5. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (G), during the fanfare period of the jackpot at times Tc5 to Tc6, the player accepts the selection of the music output during the jackpot. The player operates an operation unit such as the stick controller 31A to move a display indicating that it is a selection candidate (here, a frame display surrounding characters) and operates an operation unit such as the push button 31B. , The selection candidate music is confirmed as the music to be output. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (H), the first round of the jackpot starts from the time Tc6.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7, and 9-8 and 9-10, the 16-round normal jackpot described in FIGS. 9-10 (D) and 9-10. Rather than the execution period (60.5 seconds in this embodiment) of the production (promotion failure production), the production (promotion success production) that becomes a 16-round probability variation jackpot described in FIGS. 9-8 (D) and (E). ) (70.5 seconds in this embodiment) is executed so as to be longer. In addition, it is executed so as to be long even if the reach period is included. The fanfare period may also be lengthened.

In addition, it is more than the execution period (60.5 seconds in this embodiment) of the promotion failure effect suggesting the transition to the low accuracy and high base state described in FIGS. 9-10 (D) and 9-10 (E). The execution period (70.5 seconds in this embodiment) of the promotion success effect that suggests the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state explained in 9-8 (D) and (E) is longer. Will be executed. In addition, it is executed so as to be long even if the reach period is included. The fanfare period may also be lengthened.

When the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern PB-8, unlike the case described in FIG. 9-10, the promotion effect is not executed and the 16-round normal jackpot corresponds to "6". The combination of jackpot symbols is displayed.

FIG. 9-11 is a second timing chart showing an example of the effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of the jackpot. With reference to FIG. 9-11, FIG. 9-11 (A) is similar to FIG. 9-7 (A). When the variation pattern PB5-5 is determined with reference to FIG. 9-11 (B), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started at the time Td1 and the time Td2 is reached after the 20-second pre-reach period. , Reach (for example, the reach of the jackpot symbol "7" corresponding to the 16-round probability variation jackpot), and when the time Td3 is reached after the reach period of 30 seconds, the full rotation reach (with the combination of jackpot symbols aligned) Fluctuation display) is started. After that, the full rotation reach is executed in the undetermined period of the jackpot symbol for 120 seconds, and when the time Td4 is reached, the combination of the confirmed jackpot symbol "7" is derived and displayed. After that, when the time Td5 is reached after a 0.5-second jackpot symbol determination period, the jackpot gaming state of the 16-round probability variation jackpot is started. After that, after the fanfare effect is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Td6 is reached, the first round of the big hit is started and the big winning opening is opened.

FIG. 9-12 is a fourth screen transition diagram showing the flow of the effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 9-12 (A) with reference to FIG. 9-12, when the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the variation pattern PB5-6, at times Td1 to Td2, FIGS. 9-8 The same display as in (A) is executed by the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), at time Td2, the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes reach with the symbol “7”, and at time Td2 to Td3, the reach symbol of “7” is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (C), at time Td3, the full rotation reach is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R at the center of the image display device. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (D), at the central portion of the front image display device 5 on which the full rotation reach is executed at the times Td3 to Td4, the effect at full rotation (for example, 16 rounds by the character). A production that suggests that it will be a probabilistic jackpot) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E), at times Td4 to Td5, the combination of the jackpot symbols of "7" as the definite display corresponding to the 16-round probability variation jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Derived and displayed. After that, when the time Td5 is reached after a 0.5-second jackpot symbol determination period, the jackpot gaming state of the 16-round probability variation jackpot is started. After that, after the fanfare effect is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Td6 is reached, the first round of the jackpot is started and the jackpot is opened.

A related effect (here, an effect including the same character) is executed for the full rotation effect, the fanfare effect of the jackpot, and the effect during the round of the jackpot. Further, as the full rotation effect, an effect having a special feeling for the player is executed, which is different from the effect executed in the undetermined period shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) and 9-11 (A) and 9-8 and 9-12, the execution period of the promotion effect described in FIG. 9-8 (D) (in this embodiment). , 70.5 seconds), the execution period of the full rotation effect (150.5 seconds in this embodiment) described with reference to FIG. 9-12 is longer. In addition, it is executed so as to be long even if the reach period is included. The fanfare period may also be lengthened.

FIG. 9-13 is a third timing chart showing an example of the effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of the jackpot. With reference to FIG. 9-13, FIG. 9-13 (A) is similar to FIG. 9-7 (A). FIG. 9-13 (A) shows the case where the fluctuation pattern PB5-14 is determined in the low accuracy high base. With reference to FIG. 9-13 (B), FIG. 9-13 (B) is a case where the fluctuation pattern PB5-4 is determined in the high accuracy high base.

In the case of the big hit in the high accuracy high base state shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), the undetermined period is longer than in the case of the big hit in the low accuracy high base state shown in FIG. 9-13 (A). There is. As a result, the high accuracy high base of FIG. 9-13 (B) is more than the execution period of the promotion effect (70.5 seconds in this embodiment) in the low accuracy high base state of FIG. 9-13 (A). The execution period of the promotion effect in the state (90.5 seconds in this embodiment) is executed so as to be longer. The fanfare period may also be lengthened. In addition, the reach period may be included or lengthened.

(About the modified example of the feature part 104F)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, when it is decided to set the jackpot A, the jackpot symbol of the jackpot B, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A, is displayed and controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The effect of promoting to jackpot A may be executed.

Specifically, when it is decided to make a 16-round probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot that is more disadvantageous to the player than a 16-round probabilistic jackpot, such as a 16-round probabilistic jackpot, a 4-round probabilistic jackpot, or a 4-round probabilistic jackpot. After displaying the symbol and controlling it to the jackpot game state, the effect of promoting to the 16-round probability variation jackpot may be executed.

In addition, when it is decided to make a 16-round normal jackpot, a jackpot symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than the 16-round normal jackpot, such as a 4-round normal jackpot, is displayed and controlled to the jackpot game state, and then 16 rounds. You may also perform an effect that normally promotes to a big hit.

In addition, when it is decided to make a 4-round probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than the 4-round probabilistic jackpot, such as a 4-round normal jackpot, is displayed and controlled to a jackpot game state, and then 4 rounds. You may want to perform an effect that promotes to a probabilistic jackpot.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, the variable display time of the corresponding fluctuation pattern is the same in the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state. I decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is not in the high-accuracy high-base state, the variable display time of the corresponding fluctuation pattern may be shorter than in the high-accuracy high-base state.

For example, the variable display time of all corresponding variation patterns may be shortened. Further, among the corresponding fluctuation patterns, the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern having the longest variable display time may be shortened. Further, among the corresponding fluctuation patterns, the variable display time of a specific fluctuation pattern may be shortened.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the super reach effects shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10 are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these effects may be different. The effects shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10 are battle effects, but the enemy characters may be different or the ally characters may be different.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12, after reaching the reach, the effect is shifted to the full rotation effect without executing the effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach effect (for example, the battle effect of FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10) may be executed after the reach is reached, and then the full rotation effect may be entered. Further, after executing the pseudo continuous effect, the process may shift to the full rotation effect.

(5) As a fluctuation pattern at the time of loss in the high accuracy and high base state, a fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) in which shortening control is not executed may be set until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) after the end of the big hit. ..

(6) In the above-described embodiment, in the first specific effect such as the pre-fanfare effect of FIG. 9-7 (B), the movable body 32 is operated twice and the promotion of FIG. 9-7 (A) is performed. In the second specific effect such as the success effect, the movable body 32 is operated once. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the movable member can be easily operated when the first specific effect is executed as compared with the case where the second specific effect is executed. For example, a plurality of movable members may be provided, and only the first movable member may be operated when the second specific effect is executed, and the first movable member and the second movable member may be operated when the first specific effect is executed.

(7) The expected value of the game value (for example, a prize ball) obtained in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the number of rounds is large or small, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one round is large or small. It depends on whether the probability of getting a big hit after a big hit is high or low, and it depends on whether the slot machine is in the AT state or not.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 104F)
(1-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Compared to the first type of advantageous state (for example, 16R jackpot) and the first type of advantageous state, the expected value of the obtained game value (for example, prize ball) is low (for example, the number of rounds is small, the jackpot). With an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control any of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a second type of advantageous state (for example, a 4R big hit) with a low probability of becoming a big hit later. ,
In an advantageous state, a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a state in which the game medium can be won (for example, an open state), and
A notification effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, an effect from a reach period to an undetermined symbol display) that notifies that the control to an advantageous state is performed.
After the end of the notification effect, in a specific period (for example, a period from a symbol undetermined period to the opening of a large winning opening) until the variable winning means changes to a state in which a game medium can be won, a specific effect ( For example, it is provided with a specific effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect of a symbol undetermined period, an effect of a symbol confirmed period, and an effect of a fanfare period.
The specific period is longer when controlled by the first type of advantageous state than when controlled by the second type of advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, 9). As shown in -7, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the symbol undetermined period is longer than in the case of other jackpots. The reach period, the symbol confirmed period, and the fanfare period may be lengthened.)
The notification effect means
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in an identifiable manner (for example, reaching 7 symbols), it is notified that the control is performed in the first type of advantageous state. (For example, the unconfirmed display of 7 symbols) The first notification effect (for example, the effect from the reach period of FIG. 9-7 (B) to the unconfirmed symbol display, see FIGS. 9-9 (B), (C)). )When,
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in an identifiable manner (for example, even-numbered symbol reach), it is notified that the second type of advantageous state is controlled. (For example, the unconfirmed display of even-numbered symbols) The second notification effect (for example, the effect from the reach period of FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (C) to the unconfirmed symbol display, FIG. 9-8) (B), (C), FIGS. 9-10 (B), (C)) can be executed.
The specific production means
A first specific effect (for example, a pre-fanfare effect similar to the fanfare effect in the symbol undetermined period of FIG. 9-7 (B)) that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect. )When,
It is possible to execute the second specific effect (for example, the promotion success effect of FIG. 9-7 (A)), which is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the first type of advantageous state is controlled. Yes,
The execution period of the first specific effect is longer than that of the second specific effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-7 (A) to 9-7).

According to such a configuration, the variable winning means can win the game medium when the first type of advantageous state is controlled as compared with the case where the second type of advantageous state is controlled. By lengthening the period until it is controlled by, it is possible to reduce the game value given to the player per unit period. Further, even when the period until the variable winning means is controlled to be able to win the game medium is lengthened, the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the first specific effect, and the second identification are performed. Since the production is feasible, it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable. Further, when the first type of advantageous state is controlled, the first specific effect having a long execution period is executed, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

(1-2) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Compared to the first type of advantageous state (for example, 16R jackpot) and the first type of advantageous state, the expected value of the obtained game value (for example, prize ball) is low (for example, the number of rounds is small, the jackpot). With an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control any of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a second type of advantageous state (for example, a 4R big hit) with a low probability of becoming a big hit later. ,
In an advantageous state, a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a state in which the game medium can be won (for example, an open state), and
A notification effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, an effect from a reach period to an undetermined symbol display) that notifies that the control to an advantageous state is performed.
After the end of the notification effect, in a specific period (for example, a period from a symbol undetermined period to the opening of a large winning opening) until the variable winning means changes to a state in which a game medium can be won, a specific effect ( For example, it is provided with a specific effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect of a symbol undetermined period, an effect of a symbol confirmed period, and an effect of a fanfare period.
The specific period is longer when controlled by the first type of advantageous state than when controlled by the second type of advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, 9). As shown in -7, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the symbol undetermined period is longer than in the case of other jackpots. The reach period, the symbol confirmed period, and the fanfare period may be lengthened.)
The notification effect means
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in an identifiable manner (for example, reaching 7 symbols), it is notified that the control is performed in the first type of advantageous state. (For example, the unconfirmed display of 7 symbols) The first notification effect (for example, the effect from the reach period of FIG. 9-7 (B) to the unconfirmed symbol display, see FIGS. 9-9 (B), (C)). )When,
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in an identifiable manner (for example, even-numbered symbol reach), it is notified that the second type of advantageous state is controlled. (For example, the unconfirmed display of even-numbered symbols) The second notification effect (for example, the effect from the reach period of FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (C) to the unconfirmed symbol display, FIG. 9-8) (B), (C), FIGS. 9-10 (B), (C)) can be executed.
The specific production means
A first specific effect (for example, a pre-fanfare effect similar to the fanfare effect in the symbol undetermined period of FIG. 9-7 (B)) that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect. )When,
It is possible to execute the second specific effect (for example, the promotion success effect of FIG. 9-7 (A)), which is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the first type of advantageous state is controlled. Yes,
The total execution period of the first notification effect and the first specific effect is longer than the total execution period of the second notification effect and the second specific effect (for example, FIG. 9-7 (A)). ~ (C)).

According to such a configuration, the variable winning means can win the game medium when the first type of advantageous state is controlled as compared with the case where the second type of advantageous state is controlled. By lengthening the period until it is controlled by, it is possible to reduce the game value given to the player per unit period. Further, even when the period until the variable winning means is controlled to be able to win the game medium is lengthened, the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the first specific effect, and the second identification are performed. Since the production is feasible, it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable. Further, when controlled to the advantageous state of the first type, the first notification effect and the first specific effect, which have a long total execution period, are executed, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

(2) In the game machine of (1-1) or (1-2) above
The specific effect means is executed after the end of the second notification effect, and the third specific effect (for example, the promotion failure effect of FIG. 9-7 (C)) is notified that the second type of advantageous state is controlled. ) Is further feasible.

According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to whether the first type of advantageous state or the second type of advantageous state is reached after the end of the second notification effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. Can be done.

(3) In the game machine of (2) above
The specific effect means notifies that after the end of the second notification effect, the third specific effect is controlled to the second type of advantageous state without executing the third specific effect (for example, FIG. 9-). 4. The effect of notifying that the second type of advantageous state has been confirmed without executing the promotion failure effect shown in the fluctuation patterns PB5-8 and PB5-10 of FIGS. 9-5) can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, when the expected value of the obtained game value becomes the second type advantageous state which is lower than the first type advantageous state, the advantageous state controlled by the execution of the third specific effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player from giving too much expectation that the type of the game may actually be the first type of gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

(4) In any of the game machines (1-1) to (3) above,
Further provided with special state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a time saving state) different from the advantageous state,
When the advantageous state control means is controlled to the special state, the advantageous state controlling means controls the advantageous state of the first type at a higher rate than that of the second type (see, for example, FIG. 9-1).

According to such a configuration, in the special state, since the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state of the first type is increased, the ratio of executing the second specific effect is also increased, so that the second specific effect can be obtained. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player.

(5) In any of the game machines (1-1) to (4) above,
When the notification effect means suggests the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in a mode in which it can be specified that the first type of advantageous state is controlled (for example, "7" symbol reach), the second type of the notification effect means. The expectation that the player will be advantageous is higher than the case where it is suggested that the advantageous state is controlled in an identifiable manner (for example, "6" symbol reach). The notification effect is executed (for example, as shown in the fluctuation patterns PB5-5 in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, the jackpot is confirmed in the case of 7 symbol reach, but in the case of other symbol reach, the jackpot is confirmed. The jackpot is not confirmed. In the case of "7" symbol reach, the probability change is confirmed, but in the case of other symbol reach, it may not be the probability change confirmation. If it is not the probability change confirmation, is it promoted to the probability change? Whether or not it may be notified after that.)

According to such a configuration, when it is suggested that the expected value of the obtained game value may be the first type advantageous state, it is often advantageous for the player, so that the first type advantage By suggesting the possibility of becoming a state, the player's expectation can be increased.

(6) In any of the game machines (1-1) to (5) above,
Further equipped with a movable member (for example, a movable body 32),
When the first specific effect is executed, the specific effect means is easier to operate the movable member than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5). In the variation pattern PB5-4 and PB5-14, the movable body 32 is operated once, and in the variation pattern PB5-5 of FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, the movable body 32 is operated twice. In addition, only the first movable member may be operated when the second specific effect is executed, and the first movable member and the second movable member may be operated when the first specific effect is executed.)

According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the operation of the movable member.

(7) In any of the game machines (1-1) to (6) above,
Further provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, operation detection unit 31) for detecting motion by the player.
When the first specific effect is executed, the specific effect means executes an effect that encourages an action by the player less frequently than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 9-). 4. The fluctuation patterns PB5-4 and PB5-14 of FIGS. 9-5 prompt the continuous striking operation, and the fluctuation patterns PB5-5 of FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5 prompt the operation once).

According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the effect of encouraging the player to move.

(8) In any of the game machines (1-1) to (7) above,
The first specific effect in the first gaming state (for example, high accuracy and high base state) is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, low accuracy and high base state). The execution period is longer than the first specific effect in the low probability low base state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4, 9-5, 9-13), the 16R probability variation jackpot in the low probability high base state. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot in a high accuracy and high base state, the execution period of the promotion effect is lengthened as compared with the case of

According to such a configuration, the first specific effect having a longer execution time than the first specific effect in the second game state is executed in the first game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

(9) In any of the game machines (1-1) to (8) above,
After suggesting the type of advantageous state, in the period until the variable winning means changes to a state in which the game medium can be won, a special suggestion effect suggesting the gaming state after the advantageous state can be executed. With more suggestive production means
The special suggestion effect means
The first special suggestion effect that suggests the transition to the first game state (for example, high accuracy and high base state),
It is possible to execute a second special suggestion effect that suggests a transition to a second gaming state (for example, a low probability high base state, a low probability low base state) that is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the first gaming state. ,
The execution period of the first special suggestion effect is longer than that of the second special suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4, 9-5, 9-7, the transition to the low accuracy and high base state. The execution period of the promotion success effect that suggests the transition to the high accuracy and high base state is longer than the execution period of the promotion failure effect that suggests).

According to such a configuration, the transition to the first gaming state, which is more advantageous for the player than the second gaming state, has a longer execution time than the second special suggestion effect suggesting the transition to the second gaming state. Since the first special suggestion effect suggesting is executed, the player can be given a sense of superiority.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Compared to the first type of advantageous state (for example, 16R jackpot) and the first type of advantageous state, the expected value of the obtained game value (for example, prize ball) is low (for example, the number of rounds is small, the jackpot). With an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control any of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a second type of advantageous state (for example, a 4R big hit) with a low probability of becoming a big hit later. ,
In an advantageous state, a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a state in which the game medium can be won (for example, an open state), and
A notification effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, an effect from a reach period to an undetermined symbol display) that notifies that the control to an advantageous state is performed.
After the end of the notification effect, in a specific period (for example, a period from a symbol undetermined period to the opening of a large winning opening) until the variable winning means changes to a state in which a game medium can be won, a specific effect ( For example, it is provided with a specific effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect of a symbol undetermined period, an effect of a symbol confirmed period, and an effect of a fanfare period.
The specific period is longer when controlled by the first type of advantageous state than when controlled by the second type of advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, 9). As shown in -7, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the symbol undetermined period is longer than in the case of other jackpots. The reach period, the symbol confirmed period, and the fanfare period may be lengthened.)
The notification effect means
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in an identifiable manner (for example, reaching 7 symbols), it is notified that the control is performed in the first type of advantageous state. (For example, the unconfirmed display of 7 symbols) The first notification effect (for example, the effect from the reach period of FIG. 9-7 (B) to the unconfirmed symbol display, see FIGS. 9-9 (B), (C)). )When,
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in an identifiable manner (for example, even-numbered symbol reach), it is notified that the second type of advantageous state is controlled. (For example, the unconfirmed display of even-numbered symbols) The second notification effect (for example, the effect from the reach period of FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (C) to the unconfirmed symbol display, FIG. 9-8) (B), (C), FIGS. 9-10 (B), (C)) can be executed.
The specific production means
A first specific effect (for example, a pre-fanfare effect similar to the fanfare effect in the symbol undetermined period of FIG. 9-7 (B)) that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect. )When,
It is possible to execute the second specific effect (for example, the promotion success effect of FIG. 9-7 (A)), which is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the first type of advantageous state is controlled. Yes,
The execution period of the first specific effect is longer than that of the second specific effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C)).
further,
A control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic parts (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and a storage content can be retained even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and information on the plurality of electronic parts can be stored. The control means is provided with various storage means (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D), and the control means writes the information to the storage means when the condition for generating an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. Processing (for example, writing processing by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) can be executed, and the storage means corresponds to a storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and the second generation condition. The storage area in which the second information is written is provided as one continuous area (for example, the backup storage unit 41AKA1 including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and the first generation condition and the second generation condition are satisfied. In this case, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on). A game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the variable winning means can win the game medium when the first type of advantageous state is controlled as compared with the case where the second type of advantageous state is controlled. By lengthening the period until it is controlled by, it is possible to reduce the game value given to the player per unit period. Further, even when the period until the variable winning means is controlled to be able to win the game medium is lengthened, the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the first specific effect, and the second identification are performed. Since the production is feasible, it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable. Further, when the first type of advantageous state is controlled, the first specific effect having a long execution period is executed, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority. Furthermore, the information can be managed appropriately.

Further, the number of times the notification effect is executed may be stored in the storage means. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the execution frequency of the notification effect. In this case, the first notification effect and the second notification effect may be stored separately. By doing so, the number of executions can be grasped in more detail.

Further, the number of times the specific effect is executed may be stored in the storage means. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the execution frequency of the specific effect. In this case, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be stored separately. By doing so, the number of executions can be grasped in more detail.

Further, in the case of storing the number of times the notification effect or the specific effect is executed as described above, if the notification effect or the specific effect is executed when the first generation condition or the second generation condition is satisfied, the notification effect is concerned. Or the specific effect may not be written, or may be written after the first generation condition or the second generation condition is completed. By doing so, the burden of control is reduced.

Further, the control means may write information regarding the operation of the variable winning means (for example, the number of operations, the operation time, etc.) in the storage means. By doing so, when a malfunction occurs in the variable winning means, it becomes easier to identify the cause as compared with the case where the information regarding the operation of the variable winning means is not stored in the storage means.

Furthermore, as an example of a game machine that can improve the interest and manage information appropriately,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901).
A control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
It is provided with a storage means (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D) that can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped and can store information about the plurality of electronic components.
The control means executes a writing process (for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) for writing the information to the storage means when the event occurrence conditions corresponding to the plurality of electronic components are satisfied. It is possible and
In the storage means, a storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written are one continuous area (for example, a backup storage area). It is provided as a backup storage unit 41AKA1 including 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and when the first generation condition and the second generation condition are satisfied, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the other A game machine that does not execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the condition (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a gaming board 902 and a gaming machine frame 903. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame that rotatably supports the gaming machine frame 903. The game board 902 is a gauge board that constitutes the game board surface. The game machine frame 903 is an underframe for fixing the game board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a game area surrounded by a guide rail or the like. The game ball (game medium) launched from the launcher passes through the launch passage and is driven into the game area. The game machine frame 903 is provided with a rotatably glass door frame having a glass window.

At a predetermined position on the game board 902, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, an image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, A normal symbol display 9020, a first hold display 9025A, a second hold display 9025B, a normal figure hold display 9025C, a passing gate 9041, and the like are provided. In addition, the surface of the game board in the game area may be provided with a windmill, a large number of obstacle nails, a general winning opening, an out opening, and the like. A game effect lamp 90909 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. Speakers 908L and 908R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903.

A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) is provided at the lower right position of the game machine frame 903. The hitting ball operation handle is operated by a player or the like in order to launch the game ball toward the game area, and the elastic force of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation amount). At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, an upper plate (striking ball supply plate) for holding (storing) game balls and a lower plate (surplus) for holding (storing) surplus balls from the upper plate. A ball storage dish) is provided. A stick controller 9031A is attached to the member forming the lower plate, and a push button 9031B is provided to the member forming the upper plate.

On the screens of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the image display device 905, and the like, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is performed. These variable displays are based on the occurrence of the first starting prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906A, or in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. It becomes feasible based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the formed second starting winning opening. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is configured by using, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and is identified in a special symbol game which is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (special symbol), which is information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). The image display device 905 is configured by using, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 905, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 904A in the special symbol game and the special symbol (the first special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 904B. Corresponding to each of the variable display of 2 special symbols or the 2nd special symbol), the decorative symbol which is the identification information (decorative identification information) is variable in the decorative symbol display area which is a plurality of variable display units such as three. Is displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game. As an example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 905.

A hold storage display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. In the hold storage display area 905H, the hold display for identifiablely displaying the number of holds (the number of holds for special figures) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The hold display may be anything that can be displayed corresponding to the hold storage of information related to the variable display. Hold display may be performed together with the hold storage display area 905H, or instead of the hold storage display area 905H, using the first hold display 9025A and the second hold display 9025B.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing configuration examples of various substrates and peripheral devices. The pachinko game machine 901 is equipped with various boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a lamp output board 9013, a backup memory board 9014, and an effect data memory board 9016 as shown in FIG. In addition, a relay board 9015, a relay board 9017 for effect control, an audio output board 9018, a driver board 9019, and the like are also mounted. Further, various boards such as a power supply board, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, and the like may be mounted. Various control boards are not limited to electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electrical components are mounted, but also electrical components are mounted (mounted) on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including an electronic circuit mounting board configured as described above.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is configured so that power from an AC power source, which is an external power source (commercial power source), can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 by the power supply board. Has been done. The power supply board includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have. The power supply voltage generated by the power supply board may be supplied to the main board 9011, the effect control board 9012, or the like via the drawer relay board.

A game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011. On the main board 9011, signals taken from various detection switches such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and a second start port switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are transmitted via a switch circuit 90110. It is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100. The gate switch 9021 detects a game ball (gate passing ball) that has passed through the passing gate 9041. Based on the detection of the gate passing ball by the gate switch 9021, the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 becomes feasible. The first start opening switch 9022A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A. The second start opening switch 9022B detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B. The count switch 9023 detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907. When a game ball that has passed through various winning openings such as the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening is detected, the number of prize balls determined in advance corresponding to each winning opening is determined. The game ball as a prize is paid out.

On the main board 9011, the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 is transmitted to the solenoid 9081 for ordinary electric accessories and the solenoid 9082 for the grand prize opening door via the solenoid circuit 90111. The solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory has a state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (or a state in which it does not pass) and a state in which it is easy to pass (or a state in which it passes) through the second starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. Make it changeable. The solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door makes it possible to change the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 907 into a state in which the game ball cannot pass and a state in which the game ball can pass. From the main board 9011, a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the ordinary symbol display 9020, and the like is transmitted.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM 90101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a RAM 90102 that provides a work area for game control. , A CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 90103, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105. Be prepared. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103. In the game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011, various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game are set by, for example, a random number circuit 90104 or a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. The indicated numerical data is counted (generated) so that it can be updated. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The main board 9011 has a setting key 9051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) in the setting change state. The changeover switch 9052 is connected. The setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 may be installed at a predetermined position on the main board 9011, or may be mounted outside the main board 9011 such as a predetermined position on the power supply board. The setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 903, which can be opened by a predetermined key operation, is opened, and the predetermined key is pressed. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Since the setting key 9051 requires key operation, only the staff having the key for operating the setting key 9051 can operate it among the staff in the amusement park. The setting key 9051 is a switch that can be switched on and off by a predetermined key operation, and is also a switch that can perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation).

Various sensors such as a door opening sensor 909090 that detects the opening of the glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 902 so as to be openable and closable are connected to the main board 9011, and are based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to judge the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors). A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board are taken into the switch circuit 90110 of the main board 9011 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100. A display monitor 9029 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 9011, and a display changeover switch 9030 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 9029. The display monitor 9029 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 9029 and the display changeover switch 9030 are arranged in front of the main board 9011 when the back side of the game board 902 is visually recognized with the game machine frame 903 open.

The main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100) has each winning opening (first winning opening, second major winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the continuous ratio and the winning ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 9029. By displaying such prize information, it is possible to confirm various prize information such as the continuous ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park. On the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 901 is installed, whether or not adjustments have been made, what kind of adjustments have been made, and as a result of the adjustments, the game balls enter the general winning opening as often as designed. It is confirmed (verified) whether it is. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence / absence and contents of adjustment after installation.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, and is an image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. , Game effect lamp 909, effect motor 9060, effect LED9061, and other effect devices, and various circuits for controlling the effect operation by various effect electric parts are mounted. The effect control board 9012 is used for displaying an image on the image display device 905, outputting audio from the speakers 908L and 908R, lighting the light emitting members constituting the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061, and moving the effect movable member 9060. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the effect to execute a predetermined effect operation such as the drive operation of the. The effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 11 is equipped with electronic components such as an effect control microcomputer 90120, an external ROM 90121, and an external RAM 90121.

The effect control board 9012 is backed up with wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting an illumination signal to the lamp output board 9013, and a backup memory board 9014. Wiring for transmitting the control signal and the like, wiring for transmitting the effect data signal with the effect data memory board 9016, and the like are connected. Wiring for transmitting various signals is also connected to the audio output board 9018 and the driver board 9019 via the effect control relay board 9017. The information signal transmitted to the audio output board 9018 may include an audio signal (sound effect signal) that specifies the audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 9019 may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the effect movable member by driving the effect motor 9060. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 9019 may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting the effect LED 9061. Wiring for receiving the operation detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 9012. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the player's motion using the stick controller 9031A has been detected. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the player's motion using the push button 9031B has been detected.

The lamp output board 9013 is a board for lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is a driver IC or the like that supplies a drive current to the game effect lamp 909 or the like according to an illumination signal from the effect control board 9012. Is installed. The backup memory board 9014 is a board for storing backup data provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and can execute backup data write processing and read process according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 9012. It is configured. In the backup data writing process, the backup data is written and stored in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the effect control board 9012 or the like. The effect data memory board 9016 is a board for storing effect data provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is configured to be capable of executing the effect data reading process according to the effect data control signal from the effect control board 9012. ing. In the effect data reading process, the effect data stored in the effect data memory is read out and transmitted to the effect control board 9012 or the like. The effect data memory board 9016 is equipped with an effect data memory capable of storing the effect data. The effect data memory includes a storage area for storing various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 905, a storage area for storing various audio data indicating the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and an effect motor 9060. A storage area for storing various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the above, a storage area for storing various light emission data indicating the lighting control contents of the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061, and the like may be provided in advance. The effect data memory may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory such as a NAND ROM, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Anything may be used as long as it is configured by using.

The effect control relay board 9017 is installed on a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and relays various signals transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the audio output board 9018 and the driver board 9019. The back pack may be attached to a central portion on the back surface side of the game board 902, and an opening facing the image display device 905 may be formed in the center thereof. The back pack may be provided so as to cover a part or all of the main board 9011, the lamp output board 9013, the audio output board 9018, and the driver board 9019 from the rear. An effect control board box containing a part or all of the effect control board 9012, the backup memory board 9014, and the effect data memory board 9016 may be attached to the rear surface side of the back pack. The main board 9011 may be housed in a board case together with a setting key 9051 and a setting changeover switch 9052 that can be operated by a staff member of a game hall or the like. In this case, the display monitor 9029 and the display changeover switch 9030 arranged on the main board 9011 may also be housed in the board case. The setting key 9051, the setting changeover switch 9052, and the display changeover switch 9030 may be exposed through the openings formed on the back surface of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case. The audio output board 9018 is a board for audio output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is for outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, which are sound output devices, in accordance with the audio signal from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits are installed. The driver board 9019 is a board for drive control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the information signal from the effect control board 9012, the drive signal of the effect motor 9060 and the lighting signal of the effect LED 9061 are transmitted. The driver IC to be supplied is installed.

A security cover may be attached to cover the board case containing the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. With the gaming machine frame 903 closed, the board case containing the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 is covered with a security cover from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a result, the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 become inoperable when the game machine frame 903 is closed. In the state where the game machine frame 903 is open, the security cover may be separated from the board case to allow the operation of the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052. The setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. Further, by covering the board case including the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 with the security cover, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being operated from the inside of the game island on which the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command may include a display control command. The display control command is used to control the image display operation in the image display device 905. The effect control command may include a voice control command. The voice control command is used to control the voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The effect control command may include a lighting control command. The lighting control command is used to control the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061. The movable control command is used for controlling the operation of the effect movable member by the driving force of the effect motor 9060. Each of these commands may separately constitute an effect control command, or some or all combinations may form an effect control command.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105. The random number circuit 90104 is not limited to the one built in the game control microcomputer 90100, and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 90100.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 90104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals for various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored.

FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 9012. Some or all of the electronic components such as the effect control microcomputer 90120, the external ROM 90121, and the external RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 can be attached and detached by inserting and removing the connector pins from the connector sockets. It may be attached, and other components may be attached so as to be mountable by soldering or the like. On the effect control board 9012, connectors 90150 to 90156 are mounted together with these electronic components. The effect control microcomputer 90120 includes a CPU 90131, an internal ROM 90132, an internal RAM 90133, a watchdog timer 90134, a timer circuit 90135, an interrupt controller 90136, a serial communication circuit 90137, a clock circuit 90138, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 90140, and an audio processing circuit. It is configured to include a plurality of electronic components such as 90141, a lamp control circuit 90142, and a motor control circuit 90143. The effect control microcomputer 90120 may be any effect control microprocessor that integrates these electronic components. The CPU 90131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. The internal ROM 90132 fixedly stores a basic program of control processing executed by the CPU 90131, such as firmware, and system setting data unique to the effect control microcomputer 90120. The internal RAM 90133 provides a work area for the CPU 90131. The watchdog timer 90134 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time elapses from the monitoring time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout that becomes a time-lapse signal. Generate a signal. The CPU 90131 periodically clears and restarts the watchdog timer 90134. When the processing of the CPU 90131 is delayed due to some kind of failure and the watchdog timer 90134 cannot be cleared and the measurement time elapses, a timeout signal is generated and the processing by the CPU 90131 is reset.

The timer circuit 90135 is configured by incorporating, for example, an 8-bit programmable counter (CH0 to CH3) in 4 channels, and is a circuit capable of generating real-time interrupts and measuring time. In the timer circuit 90135, the countdown is started at a predetermined cycle from the count initial value preset for each channel, and when there is a channel whose count value becomes "00", the interrupt flag corresponding to that channel is set to the on state. To do. At this time, if the interrupt is permitted, the timer circuit 90135 generates an interrupt request to the CPU 90131 by the interrupt controller 90136. The timer circuit 90135 may have a function as an RTC (Real Time Clock). The RTC can measure the current date and time and output date and time information including date information and time information.

The interrupt controller 90136 is a circuit capable of controlling various interrupt requests generated by the effect control microcomputer 90120. The interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 include multiple types of interrupts, such as X-class interrupts (XIRQ), I-class interrupts (IRQ), software interrupts (SWI), and illegal opcode traps (ILGOP). You may. The interrupt controller 90136 includes an interrupt control register for setting the permission / rejection of interrupts and the priority of interrupts for each type of interrupt. For example, the interrupt controller 90136 may be provided with interrupt control registers corresponding to various interrupts, such as for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V-sync interrupt setting. The V-sync interrupt is an interrupt that matches the timing at which a vertical synchronization signal is output from the VDP 90140 that draws an effect image or the like on the image display device 905. In the interrupt control register corresponding to each interrupt, internal information data (interrupt permission / rejection data) indicating the approval / disapproval of the corresponding interrupt and internal information data (interrupt priority) indicating the priority of the corresponding interrupt are stored. Data) and can be set. For example, if the value of the interrupt permission / rejection data is "0", the corresponding interrupt is set to the permitted state, and if the value of the interrupt permission / rejection data is "1", the corresponding interrupt is prohibited. Set to state. The interrupt priority is set by, for example, 16 steps (4 bits) of numerical values according to the interrupt priority data, and the interrupt priority corresponding to the case of "0000 (= 0H)" is the highest, and "1111". (= FH) ”has the lowest priority of the corresponding interrupt. Not limited to interrupt control registers for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V-sync interrupt setting, for example, external interrupt, serial transmission interrupt, interrupt by random number acquisition of random number circuit, etc. , An interrupt control register may be provided corresponding to any interrupt related to the control of the effect.

The internal information data set in the interrupt control register is set in advance in a predetermined area (program management area, etc.) of the internal ROM 90132. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on, the CPU 90131 sets the serial communication circuit 90137, random number generation, internal reset operation, and the like according to the setting contents such as the program management area. At this time, the internal information data of the interrupt control register corresponding to various interrupts, such as the serial reception interrupt setting, the timer interrupt setting, and the V-sync interrupt setting provided in the interrupt controller 90136, is set. As a result, settings such as serial reception interrupt, timer interrupt, and V-sync interrupt are made. For example, in the interrupt control registers for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V-sync interrupt setting, the interrupt permission / rejection data among the internal information data shows a value of "0" and is serial. The reception interrupt, timer interrupt, and V-sync interrupt are all set to the permitted state. In addition, as for the interrupt priority data of the internal information data, the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the timer interrupt, and the timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V-sync interrupt. A 4-bit value corresponding to each is set in. A reset controller may be provided inside or outside the interrupt controller 90136. The reset controller controls various resets that occur in the effect control microcomputer 90120. Reset Controller-controlled resets include system resets and user resets. A system reset occurs when a low-level signal is input to the SRST terminal for a certain period of time. For user reset, when a low-level signal is input to the URST terminal for a certain period of time, a timeout signal of the watchdog timer 90134 occurs, an out-of-designated travel prohibition (IAT) signal occurs, an interval reset signal is output. It occurs due to a predetermined user reset factor, such as when it occurs.

The serial communication circuit 90137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from various boards and circuits other than the effect control board 9012 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 90137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a plurality of types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 90137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. The UART is a pace-synchronized serial communication standard, and transfers communication data using a start bit and a stop bit. In this case, the clock signal line is unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock-synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using clock signals. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines corresponding to each of a clock signal, a transmission data signal, a reception data signal, and a slave selection signal are provided. In the case of I2C, a signal line corresponding to each of the clock signal and the data signal is provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 90137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards. The clock circuit 90138 is a circuit that generates a clock signal to be supplied to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120, such as the CPU 90131 and the VDP 90140. For example, the clock circuit divides the external clock input to the clock input terminal to generate an internal system clock signal, and supplies the internal system clock signal to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120.

The VDP 90140 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 905 based on the display control command from the CPU 90131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP 90140 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effects display by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. The VDP90140 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP90140 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The audio processing circuit 90141 can generate an audio signal used for audio output by the speakers 908L and 908R based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 90131 and VDP 90140. The lamp control circuit 90142 can generate an illumination signal according to a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, or blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 909 or an effect LED 9061. The motor control circuit 90143 can generate a drive control signal used to drive the effect motor 9060.

The external ROM 90121 contains specific contents of the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 90120, such as instruction codes, management data, table data, and various data constituting the effect control pattern that constitute the system program and the user program executed by the CPU 90131. Is fixedly memorized. The external RAM 90122 temporarily stores various data and the like as an auxiliary area of the internal RAM 90133. The connectors 90150 to 90156 are configured by using, for example, a receptacle, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. The connectors 90150 to 90156 make it possible to output various signals on the effect control board 9012 via different paths such as different wiring patterns. The connector 90150 is a connector port for main board wiring that can connect the main board wiring that is electrically connected to the main board 9011. The connector 90151 is a connector port for power supply wiring capable of connecting power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board. The connector 90152 is a connector port for the effect relay wiring capable of connecting the effect relay wiring electrically connected to the effect relay unit such as the effect control relay board 9017. The connector 90153 is a connector port for frame lamp wiring that can connect the frame lamp wiring that is electrically connected to the lamp output board 9013 and the frame lamp portion provided with a part or all of the game effect lamp 909. is there. The connector 90154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring electrically connected to a backup unit such as a backup memory board 9014 can be connected. The connector 90155 is a connector port for effect data wiring capable of connecting an effect data wiring electrically connected to an effect data unit such as the effect data memory board 9016. The connector 90156 is a connector port for inspection wiring that can connect inspection wiring that is electrically connected to an information processing device (personal computer or the like) for inspection, testing, or development. The information processing device for inspection may function as an inspection device for the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, by executing a specific software program. In this way, the connector 90156 becomes an electronic component used as a connecting member to which the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is connected.

The connector 90156 enables the inspection wiring to be connected at the trial production stage, the development stage, or the manufacturing stage of the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, and the effect control microcomputer 90120 is shipped in response to a test command different from the effect control command. The previous inspection process may be made executable. The pre-shipment inspection process includes, for example, internal parameters and input / output signals when the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes a part or all of the program code before the completion of the software program during trial production or development. It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to the state in which the pachinko game machine 901 is installed on the game machine installation island, or the pachinko game machine 901 is independently used as a personal computer. It may be an execution environment in which the operating status can be confirmed by connecting to an information processing device such as. Further, the connector 90156 makes it possible to connect the inspection wiring at the collection stage of the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, so that the backup data can be read out according to a test command different from the effect control command. Good. Alternatively, the connector 90156 may be removed, for example, at the shipping stage of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Alternatively, the connector 90156 is mounted only on a predetermined model such as a demonstration machine or a test machine other than the model in which the pachinko game machine 901 is installed in the game hall, and is mass-produced and installed in the game hall (mass production machine). It may not be installed. A land on which the connector 90156 can be mounted may be formed on the surface of the effect control board 9012. When the connector 90156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the connector 90156 is no longer mounted may be soldered. The solder treatment is a process of applying solder to the exposed portion of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed by, for example, a cream solder printing machine or an arbitrary method that does not use a cream solder printing machine. .. Depending on whether the connector 90156 is mounted or not, the same process of soldering may be performed, or the soldering processes of different processes may be performed. When the soldering process in the same process is performed, it is not necessary to produce a plurality of patterns of metal masks used in the cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in the cost required for substrate production. By soldering unmounted lands that do not mount electronic components such as connector 90156, oxidation of the copper foil pattern is prevented, problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern are prevented, and the quality of the board is maintained appropriately. be able to.

When an electronic component such as a connector 90156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to the one coated by soldering, and for example, a resist which is an insulating film is applied. It may be coated. By covering the land on which electronic components are not mounted by any method in this way, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and maintain appropriate board quality. I hope I can. On the other hand, the land on which the electronic component is not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when the land is soldered, the solder as a conductor adheres to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, for lands on which electronic components are not mounted, soldering is not performed to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in the wiring pattern and changes in the current path, and ensure appropriate board quality. Can be maintained. By performing an insulating coating treatment instead of the solder treatment, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as a short circuit of the wiring pattern and change of the current path, and maintain the quality of the substrate appropriately. You may do so.

FIG. 13A shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory board 9014. The backup memory board 9014 is provided with a memory controller 90200, an RTC 90201, a serial communication circuit 90202, an inspection connection portion 90203, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, and a connector 90220. As described above, the backup memory board 9014 is provided with backup data memories 90210A to 90210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 90200 can execute the backup data write process and read process according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 9012. The RTC90201 can measure the current date and time and supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 90200. The serial communication circuit 90202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the effect control board 9012 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 90202 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a specific serial communication standard such as SPI. The serial communication circuit 90202 may include a communication processing unit having a hardware configuration corresponding to such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connection portion 90203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion including terminals capable of inputting and outputting inspection signals, such as a test point. When the inspection connection unit 90203 is the test point, the test probe is brought into contact with the inspection connection unit 90203, and the inspection signal is input / output between the inspection device and the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012. Or, it suffices if the backup data can be read. The inspection connection unit 90203 inputs an inspection signal between the inspection device and the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 or the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D without going through the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012. It may be possible to output and read backup data. In this way, the inspection connection unit 90203 can provide an interface for data communication with the inspection device serving as an external device on the backup memory board 9014.

The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be partially or wholly configured by using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and part or all of the SRAM (Static RAM) with a battery. May be configured using. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be partially or wholly configured by using a flash memory such as a NAND-ROM, an EEPROM, or an HDD (Hard Disk Drive). The non-volatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and is a memory written in the memory cell even when the operating power is turned off. No data is lost. The configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require battery backup for data retention, and has high speed writing, high number of rewrites, and low power consumption as compared with non-volatile memory such as flash memory, EEPROM, and HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the installation area, simplify the device configuration, improve the operation efficiency, and appropriately store and store the backup data. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to dispose of the battery, the disappearance of the stored contents due to the replacement of the battery is prevented, and the backup data can be appropriately stored and stored. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. As described above, the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be able to retain the stored contents without using a backup power supply, for example, when a part or all of them are configured by using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 90210A to 90210B may be able to hold the stored contents by using a backup power source, for example, when a part or all of them are configured by using the SRAM with a battery.

The backup memory board 9014 stores and stores various log information in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D by using the date and time information output by the RTC90201. The memory controller 90200 can execute a storage data writing process and a reading process for the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D in response to an instruction or an instruction sent from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012. In this case, by executing the writing process and the reading process of the stored data indicating the log information including the date and time information, the operation history, the setting history, and the operation history and the setting history of a plurality of electronic components used for the game and the production in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are executed. It suffices if the error history can be stored so that it can be verified after the fact.

FIG. 13B shows a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014. The effect control board 9012 includes a connector 90154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014. The backup memory board 9014 includes a connector 90220 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012. By connecting the connector 90154 and the connector 90220, the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 can be physically and electrically connected. The connector 90154 provided on the effect control board 9012 includes terminals TM01 to TM06. The connector 90220 provided on the backup memory board 9014 includes terminals TM11 to TM16. The terminals TM01 to TM06 included in the connector 90154 and the terminals TM11 to TM16 included in the connector 90220 have the corresponding terminals (for example, the terminal TM01 and the terminal TM11) physically and electrically when the connector 90154 and the connector 90220 are combined. Any relationship may be connected to.

The terminal TM01 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. The terminal TM02 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 can receive VD1 of a specific voltage used for confirming the connection with the backup memory board 9014. For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 is supplied to the terminal TM11 included in the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014. The terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 90220 may be short-circuited on the substrate of the backup memory substrate 9014. Therefore, when the connector 90154 and the connector 90220 are coupled, the voltage corresponding to VD1 is supplied from the terminal TM12 of the connector 90220 on the backup board 14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 on the effect control board 9012. To. On the other hand, when the connector 90154 and the connector 90220 are not connected and are not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 on the effect control board 9012.

In the effect control board 9012, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board 9014. In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 are connected (connected state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to the non-supply of voltage, it can be determined that the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 are not connected (not connected state). In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM02 which is the connection confirmation member. The connection state is not limited to the one that confirms the connection state based on the terminal voltage, and may be, for example, the one that confirms the connection state based on the input state of a specific signal. Alternatively, a switch or a sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 90137 included in the effect control microcomputer 90120. The terminals TM13 and TM14 included in the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 90202. Therefore, the wiring connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 90220 is connected to the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the backup memory board via the serial communication circuit 90137 and the serial communication circuit 90202. An electrical connection is provided so that the stored data can be transferred between the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the 9014. The terminals TM15 and TM16 included in the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014 are wired and connected to the inspection connection portion 90203. As a result, the wiring connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 90220 is for inspection of the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the backup memory board 9014 via the serial communication circuit 90137. An electrical connection is provided so that the inspection signal can be transmitted and received and the stored data can be transferred to and from the connection unit 90203.

The backup memory board 9014 is configured to be removable from the effect control board 9012. As a result, for example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 901 that does not use the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, the backup memory board 9014 can be removed, the flexibility of the device configuration is increased, and the manufacturing cost is increased. Can be prevented. Further, since the backup memory board 9014 can be removed to read and analyze the stored data, the work load of inspecting the stored data can be reduced. The RTC included in the timer circuit 90135 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 provided on the effect control board 9012 may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing the effect in which a plurality of pachinko game machines 901 are linked, for example. Yes, relatively high precision is required. On the other hand, the RTC90201 of the backup memory board 9014 only needs to be able to specify the context of the storage processing executed for the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, so that a relatively low-precision one can sufficiently satisfy the application. Can be done. As described above, since the RTC90201 of the backup memory board 9014 may have a relatively low accuracy, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost. The configuration and functions of the backup memory board 9014 may be configured to include the effect control board 9012. For example, the configuration and function of the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be realized by the external RAM 90122. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern on the effect control board 9012, or the switch or sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, the ball striking operation handle provided at the lower right position of the game machine frame 903 in the pachinko game machine 901 is determined based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) by the player. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the ball launching device. When a game ball that has flowed down the game area passes (enters) various prize openings, the game ball as a prize ball is paid out. For example, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 9041, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 can be executed. In the normal symbol game, the normal symbol is variablely displayed, and when a specific normal symbol that is the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol hit". When the normal symbol is variablely displayed and the normal symbol, which is a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol, is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In the case of "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the normally variable winning ball device 906B is opened in a predetermined period, and the second starting winning opening is opened. When the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A, the first starting winning is generated. When the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the second starting winning is generated. Variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols becomes feasible based on the occurrence of the first start prize and the second start prize. The special symbol includes a symbol that is out of alignment with the jackpot symbol, and the variable display result is "big hit" when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), and the variable display result is when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Becomes a "loss". When the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", the big winning opening is opened and the game ball can easily pass (enter), which is an advantageous state for the player. It becomes a big hit game state of.

The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10").

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 9011, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 90103.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011. In the game control main process, interrupt prohibition is set (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 90102 accessible, and the like.

After the initial setting, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear switch is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. The clear switch is mounted on a power supply board, for example, and when the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, a clear signal in the on state is input to the game control microcomputer 90100 via the input port. If such a clear signal is not input, it may be determined in step S903 that the clear switch is off. The backup data can be stored in RAM 90102, which is a backup RAM for game control. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 90103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 90102, a data protection process of the RAM 90102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S903, it may be determined whether or not the backup flag is on, and if it is on, it may be determined that there is backup data. The backup data saved in this way is determined by using, for example, a parity bit or a checksum whether or not the power supply matches when the power supply is stopped and when the power supply is restarted. If they match, it may be determined in step S903 that the backup RAM is normal.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the recovery process (step S904) and the setting confirmation process (step S905) are executed. In the recovery process of step S904, the work area is set based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 90102. As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, it is sufficient that the change of the special symbol can be restarted from the state before the restoration. If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), the initialization process (step S906) and the setting change process (step S907) are executed. In the initialization process of step S906, the RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102 is performed, and the initial values are set in the work area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. For example, the setting confirmation condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is on and the setting key 9051 is on at the start of the power supply in which the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed. It holds when both are satisfied. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is off or the setting key 9051 is off, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, and the setting confirmation process is terminated. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is on and the setting key 9051 is on, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation process in step S905 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear switch is off are satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear switch is off, the fact that the clear switch is off can also be included in the setting confirmation condition. In the setting confirmation process of step S905, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. A confirmation start command is sent. When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 9020 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 by the display of the display monitor 9029. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the game stop state associated therewith is terminated, and the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. For example, the setting change condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is on and the setting key 9051 is on at the start of the power supply in which the setting change process of step S907 is executed. It holds when both are satisfied. In addition, the setting change condition may include that the clear switch is on. In the setting change process of step S907, when the output signal from the door open sensor 9090 is off, the setting key 9051 is off, or the clear switch is off, the setting change condition is satisfied. It is determined that there was no setting, and the setting change process is terminated. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is on, and when the setting key 9051 is on, and when the clear switch is on, it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied. .. When the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting change start command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. .. When the pachinko game machine 901 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 901 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 9052 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 9029 is sequentially updated and displayed. For example, every time the operation of the setting changeover switch 9052 is detected, the set value is updated as "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "1"-> ... After that, based on the setting key 9051 being turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 9029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 90102, and the display monitor 9029 is stored. Turns off. As a result, the staff of the amusement park or the like is notified that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102. When the setting change state is terminated, the game stop state associated therewith ends, and the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

When the effect control board 9012 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, it may be controlled to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 905, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R, or a light emitting member such as an effect LED 9061 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner. When the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, based on the detection of the action of pressing the operation button for production such as the push button 9031B, "maintenance mode" is displayed and the mode is changed to the maintenance mode. It may be configured. The "maintenance mode" is, for example, the date and time setting in the RTC of the timer circuit 90135, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the set value was changed). This mode allows you to check (recording the changed setting value). When the setting key 9051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode may also be terminated.

In this way, when the setting key 9051 is on when the power is turned on (in addition, when the output signal from the door open sensor 9090 is on), if the clear switch is on, step S907 is performed together with the initialization process of step S906. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the recovery process of step S904, and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. On the other hand, when the setting key 9051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed, but the setting change state is not controlled and the clear switch is activated. If it is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process in step S905 or the setting change process in step S907, the random number circuit setting process is executed (step S908). The random number circuit setting process is a process in which numerical data indicating a game random number can be updated by initializing the random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be capable of autonomously updating numerical data indicating a game random number even if the random number circuit setting process by the CPU 90103 is not executed. Subsequently, the interrupt initial setting process is executed (step S909). The interrupt initial setting process is a process in which the permission / rejection and priority of interrupt can be set according to the interrupt factor generated by the game control microcomputer 90100. For example, the CPU 90103 may read the interrupt initial setting information stored in a predetermined area (program management area, etc.) of the ROM 90101, and set the interrupt permission / rejection and the priority according to the read value for each interrupt factor. .. The interrupt initial setting process includes a process of generating a periodic timer interrupt at predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.) by setting the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100. You may. After that, after setting the interrupt permission (step S9010), the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 at predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. The CPU 90103, which has received the interrupt request signal from the CTC and has received the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt process.

The game control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 90103 may include a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. .. The switch process is a process in which the CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of detection signals received from various switches via the switch circuit 90110. The error processing on the main side is a processing for performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and making it possible to generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output processing includes, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times a jackpot has occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start prizes, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901. This is a process that enables output of data such as probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times a probability change state has occurred). The game random number update process is a process that enables software to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the side of the main board 9011. The special symbol process process is a process that makes it possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and control the game state. The normal symbol process processing manages the execution and hold of the normal map game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 9021 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 9041), and the variable winning ball based on the "normal symbol hit". This is a process that makes it possible to control the opening of the device 6B. The command control process is a process that enables the effect control command set to be transmitted to be transmitted to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012.

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, first, the start winning determination process is executed. After the start winning determination process is executed, one of the plurality of processes is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102. The processes that can be selected according to the value of the special symbol process flag are special symbol normal processing, variation pattern setting processing, special symbol variation processing, special symbol stop processing, jackpot opening pre-processing, jackpot opening processing, jackpot opening post-processing, It suffices to include a part or all of the processing according to the program for game control, such as the big hit end processing, the small hit opening pre-processing, the small hit opening processing, and the small hit end processing.

In the start-up prize determination process, it is determined whether or not the first start-up prize or the second start-up prize has occurred, and if it does occur, a setting for updating the number of reserved memories is made. The number of reserved memories indicates the number of variable displays of special symbols and decorative symbols that have not yet been started. In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the execution of the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit". Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the finalized special symbol in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the variable display result. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variable display result and the like. In the special symbol variation processing, settings for varying the special symbol and settings for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation are made. In the special symbol stop process, settings are made to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result.

In the big hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result corresponds to the "big hit", and the setting for opening the big winning opening in the big hit game state is made. In the process of opening the jackpot, it is determined whether or not to return the jackpot that was opened in the jackpot game state to the closed state. In the jackpot opening post-processing, after returning the jackpot to the closed state, it is determined whether or not the number of round executions has reached the upper limit, and if not, the next round can be executed, and if it has been reached, it can be executed. Settings for ending the jackpot game state are made. In the jackpot end process, after waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state elapses, settings for starting probability variation control and time saving control are performed. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result corresponds to the "small hit", and settings are made to open the large winning opening in the small hit game state. In the small hit opening process, it is determined whether or not to return the large winning opening that was opened in the small hit game state to the closed state. In the small hit end process, after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit game state is reached. Settings are made to continue.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. In the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) can be changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of three stages from "1" to "3". "1" has the lowest ball output rate, and the larger the value in the order of "1", "2", and "3", the higher the ball output rate. .. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is in the order of "2" and "3", the higher the advantage is stepwise. The probability of winning a small hit may be the same regardless of the set value.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 90101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the display result determination is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol (special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is subject to variable display. In that case, the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2" (second), that is, the second special symbol (special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is the target of the variable display. A judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set for each of the cases. FIG. 15 (A) shows a display result judgment table corresponding to the set value “1”, FIG. 15 (B) shows a display result judgment table corresponding to the set value “2”, and FIG. 15 (C) shows the display result judgment table. The display result judgment table corresponding to the set value "3" is shown.

When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value of "1" is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. If so, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". When the set value is "1" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), a part of the judgment values is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the set value is When it is "1", the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". When the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as the judgment value when the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (first). Even when the second special symbol is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, at the time of the probability change) Wins a big hit at 1/32). When the set value is "1" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), half of the judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits. Similar to the cases where the values are "2" and "3", the small hit is won with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value "2" is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), it is higher than when the set value is "1". Win a big hit with a probability (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). When the set value is "2" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit. The same judgment value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change) to win the big hit. When the display result determination table corresponding to the set value "3" is used and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), the set values are "1" and "2". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). When the set value is "3" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit. The same judgment value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change) to win the big hit.

The CPU 90103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 90103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. As a result, the winning of the big hit and the winning of the small hit are determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" here indicates the probability of becoming a big hit (ratio) and the probability of becoming a small hit (ratio). Determining whether or not to make a jackpot is to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, and the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B is changed to the jackpot symbol. It is also to decide whether or not to do it. Determining whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state, and the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B is made small. It is also to decide whether or not to make a winning pattern. The winning probability of a small hit may be different depending on the set value. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of “1”, “2”, and “3”. The setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. If the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, design the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" to be 1 / 93.75, and set the value "3". The winning probability of the small hit in the above may be set to 1 / 87.5. When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not provided with a small hit, a display result determination table excluding the hit determination value corresponding to the small hit may be used. A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is performed when the first special symbol is changed and the second special symbol is changed regardless of the buffer value specified by the variable special symbol. The small hit is determined by using a common table in the table, and the small hit is determined by a separate table for the case where the variable special figure specification buffer value is "1" (first) and the case where it is "2" (second). It may be done by using. It may be configured so that the rank of advantage changes according to the game state. For example, it is applied to a game machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is generated with a high probability of 1/2 and it can be a period in which a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, a specific gaming state (in this example, in this example). In the high probability / high base state), unlike other game states, the setting value "1", which is unlikely to cause a big hit (the high probability / high base state is easy to continue), is set to have the highest advantage. You may. When applied to a game machine whose probabilistic state ends based on the execution of a predetermined number of fluctuation displays (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probabilistic state (high probability state), the same probability change end number can be used. For example, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3". The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be two or four or more.

When the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit", the big hit type may be set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. May be done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided. To determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of jackpot types A to C based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit". A reference jackpot type determination table may be provided. In the jackpot type determination table, determination values may be assigned so as to make the determination ratio of the jackpot type different depending on which of "1" to "3" the set value is. For example, when the set value is "1", the percentage determined for the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", the percentage determined for the jackpot type B is high, and the set value is "3". In the case of, the determination value may be assigned so that the ratio determined to the jackpot type A is high.

The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period in the jackpot game may be determined for each jackpot type. The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of the special symbol process process is executed on the main board 9011 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 9012 side, the start of the jackpot game state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect is executed as the effect effect to be notified. The interval period is, for example, a period during which the special symbol process processing after opening the jackpot is executed on the main board 9011 side, and after the round of opening the jackpot on the effect control board 9012 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round. The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end processing of the special symbol process processing is executed on the main board 9011 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 9012 side. It is a period to be done. As an example, the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be set to be the longest for the jackpot type A, then the longest for the jackpot type B, and the shortest for the jackpot type C. .. If the ratio of the jackpot type C determined when the set value is "1" is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. If the ratio of the jackpot type A determined to be high when the set value is "3", the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The set values are configured so that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) increases in the order of "1" <"2" <"3", and at the same time, the set values are "1" <"2" <"3". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be increased in the order of. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the game is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming too high. During the jackpot game, a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests a set value may be configured to be feasible. The jackpot suggestion effect can be performed during the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period. In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed. Regardless of the set value, the fanfare period, interval period and ending period may be fixedly set. One of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods with different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot types A <B <C. As a result, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The number of time reduction control and probability variation control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high accuracy control and time reduction control executed after the end of the jackpot game state is the jackpot game. After the end of the state, it may be continuously executed until a big hit occurs again. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. In addition to or instead of the configuration so that the percentage of jackpots is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different for each set value. The number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, and the number of controls may be different for each jackpot type, so that the degree of advantage may be different. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type. Depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that cannot be determined among the jackpot type A, jackpot type B, and jackpot type C. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type is 100%. It includes determining by percentage. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be different regardless of the jackpot type. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may. It suffices if the game entertainment can be improved by differently determining the jackpot type when the variable display result is "big hit" according to the set value. The jackpot type may be determined by using the random number value MR1 for determining the display result. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Regardless of whether or not the setting has been changed when the power is turned on, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period. Using the RTC of the game control microcomputer 90100 or the like, a special period may be set as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 10 am to 11 am). The period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period. In the special period, the rate of normal reach loss is higher than in the non-special period, and even if a fluctuation pattern judgment table is used in which judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the rate of normal reach loss between the set values becomes large. Good. As a result, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motivation for playing the game in the special period is given. It is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of the special period, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be provided. In this way, within the range where the special conditions are satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, as long as the special conditions are not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the directing of the production in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. Further, the arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to execute.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 9012 will be described. In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the effect control microcomputer 90120 is started, and the effect control main process is executed by the CPU 90131. The program for executing the effect control main process may be stored in advance in one or both of the internal ROM 90132 and the external ROM 90121. As described above, the program for executing the effect control main process may be partially or wholly stored in the internal ROM 90132 or the external ROM 90121 in advance.

FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. In the effect control main process, the initialization process is executed (step S9021). In the initialization process of step S9021, one or both of the external RAM 90122 and the internal RAM 90133 are cleared to set various initial values, and the register settings of the timer circuit 90135 are initialized. Following the initialization process, the initial operation control process is executed (step S9022). In the initial operation control process of step S9022, control for performing the initial operation of the effect movable member, such as control for driving the effect motor 9060 to return the effect movable member to the initial position and control for confirming the operation, is executed. .. After the initial operation control process, information processing at power-on is executed (step S9023). In the power-on information processing in step S9023, the storage process of the log information including the power-on date and time may be executed. The data indicating the log information is written and stored as backup data in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014. The CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 transmits a control signal corresponding to a backup command for turning on the power to the backup memory board 9014 via the serial communication circuit 90137. In the backup memory board 9014, the memory controller 90200 responds to the backup command indicated by the control signal received via the serial communication circuit 90202, and writes log information including the power-on date and time using the date and time information acquired from RTC90201. The process may be executed. In the power-on information processing in step S9023, the backup recovery process may be executed to restore the settings and control based on the log information stored in the log area.

After information processing at power-on, the interrupt initial setting process is executed (step S9024). In the interrupt initial setting process in step S9024, it is sufficient that the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 can be initially set. The interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 may be set in a program management area provided in one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132 based on the interrupt priority data stored in advance. For example, the interrupt priority is such that the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt, and the effect control timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V-sync interrupt. Should be set. Then, after setting the interrupt permission (step S9025), the loop processing is started.

FIG. 16B shows an example of setting the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 90120. The processing priority of the effect control microcomputer 90120 may be determined in advance based on the specifications of the effect control microcomputer 90120 as well as the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 90136. As an example, the CPU exception event occurrence processing has the highest priority, then the VDP error interrupt processing has the highest priority, and then the processing according to the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 90136. The processing priority may be set in advance so as to be the priority of. The VDP error interrupt process may be executed based on the occurrence of an interrupt factor that can be controlled by the interrupt controller 90136. In this case, for example, the interrupt initial setting process in step S9024 may be used to set the interrupt priority so that the VDP error interrupt has the highest priority. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is a process executed by the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 when an exception event occurs due to an abnormality in the internal state or the like. The exception event of CPU 90131 may occur when an undefined instruction that is not defined in the instruction set is decoded. The exception event of CPU 90131 may occur when an invalid operation such as division by zero or overflow is executed. The exception event of CPU 90131 may occur when a memory protection violation in virtual memory occurs. The exception event of the CPU 90131 may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) error in which the conversion from the virtual address to the physical address becomes abnormal. The VDP error interrupt processing is a process executed when an error interrupt request occurs due to an abnormality in the internal state or the like in the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. The error interrupt request for the VDP 90140 may be generated in response to an exception event for the VDP 90140, as in the case of the CPU 90131. In addition, the error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 may be generated when the setting of the clock signal (dot clock) used for the display control of the image display device 905 is abnormal. The error interrupt request of VDP90140 may occur when the decoding error of the moving image data occurs. The error interrupt request of VDP90140 may occur when the audio data is decoded abnormally. The error interrupt request of VDP90140 may be generated in response to the system reset in VDP90140. As described above, the processing at the time of occurrence of the CPU exception event is executed when the exception event of the CPU 90131 occurs. The VDP error interrupt process is executed when an error interrupt request for VDP90140 occurs. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the CPU 90131 is satisfied, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed. When the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the VDP 90140 is satisfied, the VDP error interrupt processing is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing and the VDP error interrupt processing can be executed when the event occurrence conditions such as the CPU 90131 and VDP 90140 that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device and the processing device are satisfied.

FIG. 17A is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, the exception time preprocessing is executed (step S9041). In the exception time preprocessing in step S9041, control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (stack area or the like) of the internal RAM 90133, for example. The control information for executing the instruction code may include the stored value of the program counter (PC: Program Counter) and the value of the program status word (PSW: Program Status Word). Following the exception-time pre-processing, the exception-time backup processing is executed (step S9042). In the exception time backup process in step S9042, the storage process of the log information including the exception event information is executed. In this case, a control signal corresponding to a backup command for when an exception event occurs is transmitted to the backup memory board 9014. The backup instruction for when an exception event occurs may include exception event information that can identify the exception event that has occurred in the CPU 90131. The exception event information may indicate the type of exception event in an identifiable manner. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 receives the backup command for when an exception event occurs, the memory controller 90200 may execute the process of writing the log information including the exception event information by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC90201.

After the exception-time backup process, other exception-time processes are executed (step S9043). In step S9043, for example, the exception handling routine may be started by accessing the vector table and jumping to the acquired exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 may be saved. If the exception event can be resolved by the exception handling routine, or if the exception event cannot be resolved and a reset occurs, the same backup process as in step S9042 can be executed to resolve the exception event or resolve it. The log information when it does not exist may be memorable. When the exception time processing is completed, the exception time post processing is executed (step S9044), and the CPU exception event occurrence processing is terminated. In the post-exception processing in step S9044, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the CPU 90131 is restored, and the control information for executing the instruction code is restored, so that the processing before the occurrence of the exception event can be restored. Just do it.

FIG. 17B is a flowchart showing an example of VDP error interrupt processing. In the VDP error interrupt processing, first, the error interrupt preprocessing is executed (step S9051). In the error interrupt preprocessing in step S9051, control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (stack area or the like) of the internal RAM 90133, for example. Following the error interrupt preprocessing, the error interrupt backup process is executed (step S9052). In the error interrupt backup process in step S9052, the log information including the VDP error information is stored. In this case, a control signal corresponding to a backup command for when a VDP error occurs is transmitted to the backup memory board 9014. The backup instruction for when a VDP error occurs may include VDP error information that can identify the error that occurred in the VDP 90140. The VDP error information may identifiable the type of VDP error. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 receives the backup command when a VDP error occurs, the memory controller 90200 may execute the process of writing the log information including the VDP error information by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC90201.

After the error interrupt backup process, other error interrupt processes are executed (step S9053). In step S9053, for example, depending on the interrupt factor corresponding to the VDP error, the interrupt processing routine may be branched by jumping to the acquired interrupt handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 may be saved. If the VDP90140 can autonomously execute the recovery process from the internal error, it may wait until it receives the notification of the completion of recovery or the notification of the occurrence of reset due to the inability to recover. Upon receiving these notifications, the same backup process as in step S9052 may be executed to store the log information when the VDP 90140 recovers from the error state or cannot recover. When the error interrupt processing is completed, the error interrupt post-processing is executed (step S9054), and the VDP error interrupt processing is terminated. In the post-processing at the time of error interruption in step S9054, it is possible to return to the processing before the occurrence of the VDP error by returning the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the CPU 90131 and returning the control information for executing the instruction code. And it is sufficient.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes the exception time backup processing in step S9042. The VDP error interrupt process includes the error interrupt backup process in step S9052. In the exception time backup process in step S9042, as backup data indicating log information, data including exception event information regarding the CPU 90131 among a plurality of electronic components is provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014. The write process for writing to the area is executed. In the backup process at the time of error interruption in step S9052, as backup data indicating log information, data including VDP error information regarding VDP 90140 among a plurality of electronic components is provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014. The write process to write to the log area is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when the exception event of the CPU 90131 occurs, assuming that the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the CPU 90131 is satisfied. The VDP error interrupt processing is executed when an error interrupt request for the VDP 90140 is generated, assuming that the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the VDP 90140 is satisfied. In this way, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the control device or processing device such as CPU 90131 or VDP 90140 is satisfied, information about a plurality of electronic components is written in the storage area such as the log area. A writing process for storing can be executed.

After the interrupt permission is set in step S9025 of the effect control main process, a timeout occurs in the predetermined channel of the timer circuit 90135 every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), so that the interrupt controller 90136 to the CPU 90131 Then, an interrupt request signal corresponding to the timer interrupt for effect control is output. Upon receiving this interrupt request signal, the CPU 90131 that has received the interrupt request starts executing the effect control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 90131. In the effect control timer interrupt process, the command analysis process is executed (step S9071). In the command analysis process of step S9071, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect is read. Settings and controls corresponding to control commands are performed. Following the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed (step S9072). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation in a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 909 and an effect LED 9061, and an effect motor 9060. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the. In addition, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, various determinations related to the effect can be made according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011, the elapsed time depending on the progress of the game or the effect, or the detection result. Decisions, settings, etc. are made.

Next to the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed (step S9073). In the effect random number update process in step S9073, at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 9012 side is updated by software. After the effect random number update process, the effect mode change process is executed (step S9074). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be controlled into three types of effect modes A to effect mode C, and depending on which effect mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 905 may be displayed. Differently, the types of characters appearing in the advance notice production and the reach production may be different. The control for changing from the current effect mode to a different effect mode may be performed when the effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when a specific date or time is reached based on the date and time information acquired from the RTC included in the timer circuit 90135, the effect mode change condition may be satisfied and the effect mode may be changed. Alternatively, the effect mode may be changed when the lottery process using the effect random numbers is executed and the effect mode change condition is satisfied according to the determination result.

Following the effect mode change process, an error notification process is executed (step S9075). In the error notification process in step S9075, control is performed to notify various errors that have occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The notification by such control may include a left-handed notification and a full tank notification. The left-handed notification is a notification that prompts the player to perform a left-handed operation, for example, based on the total number of times that the game ball has been detected to pass through the passing gate provided in the right area of the game area. The left-handed notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "Aim to the left!" On the image display device 905, a notification by lighting all of the game effect lamps 909, and a notification sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The notification by the above, or a combination of some or all of them may be included. The full tank notification is a notification that, when a full tank state of the surplus ball storage plate (lower plate) is detected, urges the player to eliminate the full tank state based on the elapsed time during which the full tank state continues. .. The full tank notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "The lower plate is full!" On the image display device 905, a notification by lighting all the game effect lamps 909, and a notification sound from the speakers 908L and 908R. It may include notification by outputting the above, or a combination of some or all of them. In addition, the error notification processing is performed by displaying, lighting, emitting light, sound output, or a combination of a part or all of them according to the occurrence of the error specified by the game control error specification command transmitted from the main board 9011. , Controls for notifying various errors that have occurred may be included. Alternatively, regardless of the game control error designation command, when it is determined that an error related to electronic components including the effect device has occurred according to the processing result of the CPU 90131, display, lighting, light emission, sound output, or sound output, or Control to notify various errors that have occurred may be performed by a combination of a part or all of them.

After the error notification process, the maintenance mode process is executed (step S9076). In the maintenance mode process of step S9076, control is performed so that the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed. On the maintenance history screen, for example, when the setting confirmation status or the maintenance mode menu screen corresponding to the setting confirmation status is displayed, the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B to be operated by the staff of the game hall is detected. Based on the result, it can be displayed when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed. When the maintenance history screen is displayed, all log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014. The image display device 905 displays a maintenance history screen that includes the read log information as history information. The setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B by the staff of the game hall. Become. When the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, all the setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014. The image display device 905 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen that includes read setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed even if they can be displayed based on the detection result of the operation performed by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 901, unlike the staff at the game hall. Good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen are screens that cannot be visually recognized by the player of the pachinko gaming machine 901 during the game, and can be confirmed by the staff of the game hall or the person in charge at the manufacturer. Just do it.

After the maintenance mode process, the current time setting process is executed (step S9077). In the current time setting process of step S9077, control for setting the current date and the current time is performed. In this case, the setting information of the current date and the current time can be input based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B operated by the staff of the game hall. For example, an hour signal indicating an hour, a minute signal indicating a minute, a second signal indicating a second, a year signal indicating a year, a month signal indicating a month, a day signal indicating a day, and a day of the week signal indicating a day of the week are input. CPU 90131 receives sequentially. By updating the stored information of the RTC in the timer circuit 90135 in response to these received signals, it is sufficient that the current date and the current time settings measured by the RTC of the timer circuit 90135 can be changed. By updating the stored information of the RTC90201 provided on the backup memory board 9014 according to the input setting information, the current date and the setting of the current item measured by the RTC90201 may be changed. When the current time setting process is completed, the date and time information storage process is executed (step S9078). In the date / time information storage process in step S9078, control is performed in which date / time information is stored and stored in a temporary area of the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133 at a predetermined cycle (every 100 milliseconds or the like). The date and time information stored in the temporary area may be memorable as log information indicating the power failure date and time when the RAM clear notification command or the power failure recovery designation command from the main board 9011 is received. Then, after executing the backup process during the effect control (step S9079), the effect control timer interrupt process ends. In the backup process during the effect control in step S9079, when the preset backup conditions are satisfied, the backup data indicating various log information is transferred to the log area provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014. A storage process for storing and storing is executed. The log information to be stored in this case may be information including a part or all of the operation history, setting history, error history, etc. of the plurality of electronic components used for the game and the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Further, the log information may include date and time information indicating the stored date and time.

FIG. 19 shows an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted for the game from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012. In the following, the subscript H is indicated to be a hexadecimal number. The effect control command that can be received by the effect control microcomputer 90120 has a 2-byte structure, the first byte is MODE data indicating the classification of the command, and the second byte is EXT data indicating the type of command. The first bit (bit 7) of the upper data (MODE data) of the effect control command is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the lower data (EXT data) of the effect control command is always set to "0". Will be done. The effect control command is not limited to the 2-byte structure, and a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. The effect control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 as the game progresses. The effect control microcomputer 90120 receives any of the effect control commands as the game progresses. As described above, the effect control command is a game effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 to the effect control microcomputer 90120 on the effect control board 9012 in accordance with the control related to the progress of the game. Is.

The variation start command 80XXH specifies that the variation starts for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a plurality of special symbols. The lower data (EXT data) of the fluctuation start command, XXH, may be, for example, 01H at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol and 02H at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. The variation pattern designation command 81XXH specifies a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 905 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the fluctuation pattern designation command, indicates a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. The display result specification command 8CXXXH specifies the display result of the variable display. XXH, which is lower-level data (EXT data) of the display result specification command, indicates a value corresponding to the display result of the variable display. The symbol confirmation command 8F00H specifies that the variation of the symbol is terminated. The RAM clear notification command 9000H notifies that when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the stored contents of the RAM 90102 are cleared due to the initialization by the game control microcomputer 90100. The setting change start command 9100H specifies the start of the setting change state that enables the setting value to be changed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started. The power failure recovery designation command 9200H specifies the execution of the power failure recovery process corresponding to the power failure recovery. The setting change end command 93XXH specifies the end of the setting change state. In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. For example, command 9300H specifies that the set value is set to "1", command 9301H specifies that the set value is set to "2", and command 9302H specifies that the set value is set to "3". Specify that it is set. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value specification command for specifying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be prepared. The setting value specification command corresponds to the fluctuation start at each time of the special figure game, for example, with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted. May be sent. Further, a set value designation command may be transmitted as the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times, for example, every 10 variation starts in the special figure game. Instead of these, or in addition to these, a setting value designation command may be transmitted in association with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value specification command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command.

The setting confirmation start command 9400H specifies the start of the setting confirmation state that enables the setting value to be confirmed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started. The setting confirmation end command 9401H specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The game state specification command 95XXH specifies the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which the time reduction control is performed. This is the second game state specification command corresponding to. The game control error designation command 96XXH specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) related to game control in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the game control error specification command, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 9012 side. , The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) may be notified by the error notification process. The customer waiting demo designation command 9F00H specifies the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the progress stop of the game in the customer waiting state. The hit start designation command A0XXH specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The large winning opening open designation command A1XXH specifies that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The designation command A2XXH after opening the large winning opening specifies that the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The hit end designation command A3XXH specifies the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The background specification command B0XXH specifies the display state of the background screen according to the game state and the like. The first hold storage number designation command C1XXH specifies the first hold storage number. The first reserved storage number is a variable display reserved number corresponding to the first special symbol display device 904A among the reserved storage numbers, and is, for example, a value of any one of "0" to "4". The second hold storage number designation command C2XXH specifies the second hold storage number. The second reserved storage number is a variable display reserved number corresponding to the second special symbol display device 904B among the reserved storage numbers, and is, for example, a value of any one of "0" to "4". The winning determination result specification command C3XXH specifies the winning determination result. The winning determination result is when the first start opening switch 9022A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, or when the second starting opening switch 9022B has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. Whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" when a sphere is detected, for example, using numerical data indicating a game random number extracted from a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90104 or RAM 90102. The result of judging the fluctuation pattern and the result of judging the fluctuation pattern are shown. That is, whether the winning determination result is a result of determining whether or not the winning state is controlled before determining whether or not to control the advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, or whether the result is a specific fluctuation pattern. The result of judging whether or not it is shown is shown.

FIG. 20 shows an example of the contents of an effect control command that is a test command that can be received by the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012. The effect control command, which is a test command, also has a 2-byte structure like the effect control command for games. In the effect control command that serves as a test command, the upper data (MODE data) is set to any of F0H to F3H. These higher-level data (MODE data) are values that are not used in the effect control command for games, and may be prepared in advance as dedicated commands for performing various inspections. The test command is not limited to the 2-byte configuration, and a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used, for example. The test command is not included in the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 as the game progresses. The test command is transmitted from the inspection device as an external device connected to, for example, the connector 90150, 156, or the inspection connection unit 90203 provided on the backup memory board 9014 via the signal wiring, and is transmitted from the effect control board 9012. Based on the reception by the effect control microcomputer 90120, the inspection process corresponding to the reception command can be executed. As described above, the effect control command as a test command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 as the game progresses. Unlike the control command, it is an effect control command for inspection that makes it possible to execute inspection processing that performs various inspections.

The black screen display command F000H causes the image display device 905 to display a black screen for testing. The black screen for testing is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The ROM check screen command F005H displays the execution result and version information of various ROM inspection processes such as the external ROM 62AK120 on the screen of the image display device 905. The red display command F020H causes the image display device 905 to display a red screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is red. The green display command F021H causes the image display device 905 to display a green screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is green. The blue display command F022H displays a blue screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is blue on the image display device 905. The white display command F023H causes the image display device 905 to display a white screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is white. The black display command F024H causes the image display device 905 to display a black screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is black. The RTC value type specification command F1XXH specifies the type of RTC value. XXH, which is lower-level data (EXT data) of the RTC value type specification command, indicates a value corresponding to the type of RTC value, such as year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second. The RTC numerical value setting command F2XXH sets specific contents and numerical values for the RTC value type specified by the RTC value type specification command F1XXH. XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the RTC numerical value setting command, shows the values corresponding to specific numerical values for the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second, and corresponds to the day of the week from Sunday to Saturday. Shows the value.

The check processing and the like designation command F3XXH specifies to execute various check processes to be inspection processes. For example, XXH, which is lower-level data (EXT data) of a command for specifying a check process or the like, indicates a unique value different between one check process and another check process, or a value common to a plurality of types of check processes. There may be cases. If the F3XXH command for specifying check processing, etc. can execute various check processing, which is inspection processing, when a plurality of test commands are configured and received in a predetermined order as a combination of multiple test commands. Good. In addition, as the order of receiving a plurality of predetermined test commands corresponding to various check processes that are inspection processes, a plurality of types of orders are predetermined, and the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received. It suffices if it is possible to execute different inspection processes depending on the type of.

FIG. 21 shows a setting example of the reception order of the test command by the reception order list and the processing to be executed. Backup clear, external RAM check (short), external RAM check (long), and backup check are prepared in advance as processes that can be executed by combining a plurality of test commands. FIG. 21A shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the backup clear process is executed. FIG. 21B shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the external RAM check (short) process is executed. FIG. 21C shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the external RAM check (long) process is executed. FIG. 21D shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the backup inspection process is executed. In the reception order shown in FIGS. 21A to 21D, a combination of a plurality of test commands is received in the order from top to bottom, and when all the reception orders match, the corresponding processing is executed.

The backup clear process is a process of initializing the stored contents of backup data. The backup data is, for example, stored data in a log area provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014, and shows various log information. The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes for checking whether or not data can be appropriately written and read in the storage area of the external RAM 90122. The external RAM check (short) process may be a process that can be executed in a shorter time than the external RAM check (long) process, and may include a process content that is simpler than the external RAM check (long) process. .. The backup inspection process is an inspection process executed based on the stored contents of the backup data. In this case, the backup data read from the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014 may be output to an inspection device as an external device.

The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes that enable inspection of the state of an electronic component called the external RAM 90122. The backup inspection process is an inspection process that enables confirmation of information on various electronic components based on the stored contents of backup data indicating log information. As described above, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute the inspection process that makes it possible to inspect or confirm the state of the electronic component by combining a plurality of test commands. The combination of a plurality of test commands according to the reception order is composed of a check processing or the like designation command in which all the upper data (MODE data) of the reception command is F3H. In this way, the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the inspection process is configured as a combination of the effect control commands for inspection different from the effect control commands for the game received as the game progresses. .. Therefore, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component is not executed based on the reception of the effect control command for the game. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection process for inspecting the state of electronic components from being erroneously executed based on the effect control command for the game received as the game progresses, and perform an appropriate inspection. Can be done. In addition, since the possibility that the inspection process is mistakenly executed while the game is in progress is reduced, troubles caused by misunderstanding that the game machine is damaged due to the wrong execution of the inspection process can be prevented and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the interruption and improve the reliability of the inspection process.

The combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing the backup clear process includes a command that is F311H among the designated commands such as the check process. The combination of a plurality of test commands received when the external RAM check (short) process is executed includes a command that is F312H among the designated commands such as the check process. The combination of a plurality of test commands received when the external RAM check (long) process is executed includes a command that is F313H among the designated commands such as the check process. The combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing the backup inspection process includes a command of F314H among the designated commands such as the check process. None of these commands are included in the combination of multiple test commands received when performing other processing. In this way, a combination of multiple test commands received to perform a particular test process contains a unique test command that is not included in the combination of multiple test commands received to perform another test process. It may be included. For example, among the specified commands such as check processing, the command that becomes F303H or the command that becomes F304H is a case where any of backup clear processing, external RAM clear (short) processing, external RAM clear (long) processing, and backup inspection processing is executed. Is also included in the combination of multiple test commands received. Thus, a combination of multiple test commands received to perform a particular test process includes a common test command that is also included in a combination of multiple test commands received to perform another test process. You may be. Further, for example, the command that is F37FH among the designated commands such as the check process is the test command that is finally received in the combination of the plurality of received test commands regardless of which process is executed. Thus, the last test command received in a combination of multiple test commands received to perform a particular test process is the last test command received in a combination of multiple test commands received to perform another test process. It may be a command common to the received test command. Note that the first test command received in a combination of multiple test commands is not limited to a unique command, and at least one received in a common order in a combination of multiple test commands corresponding to multiple types of inspection processing. The test command of the part may be a unique command. Further, the test command received last in a combination of a plurality of test commands is not limited to a common command, and at least one received in a common order in a combination of a plurality of test commands corresponding to a plurality of types of inspection processes. The test command of the part may be a common command. The combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the inspection process may be configured as a combination of a larger number of commands than the effect control command for the game received as the game progresses. In this case, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component is not executed by the number of effect control commands received for the game. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection process for inspecting the state of electronic components from being erroneously executed based on the effect control command for the game received as the game progresses, and perform an appropriate inspection. Can be done. In addition, since the possibility that the inspection process is mistakenly executed while the game is in progress is reduced, troubles caused by misunderstanding that the game machine is damaged due to the wrong execution of the inspection process can be prevented and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the interruption and improve the reliability of the inspection process. As a combination of a plurality of test commands, there are multiple types of order in which the test commands are received. Then, as inspection processing such as external RAM check (short) processing, external RAM check (long) processing, and backup inspection processing, different processing can be executed depending on the type of order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received. .. In addition, the inspection process for inspecting the state of electronic components differs depending on the combination of a plurality of test commands. As a result, various inspection processes for inspecting the state of electronic components can be executed, and appropriate inspection can be performed.

In the effect control timer backup process executed in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the preset backup condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied, the backup process for storing and storing the backup target data corresponding to the satisfied backup condition is executed. As the backup condition, it is sufficient that a plurality of different conditions can be set according to the occurrence of an event including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The backup control table showing a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (program management area or the like) provided in one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, for example. The data to be backed up may include different data depending on the backup conditions. Alternatively, the data to be backed up may include data common to a plurality of backup conditions. Regardless of which backup condition is satisfied, the backup target data indicating the log information including the date and time information may be stored. As a backup method for storing the backup target data, a batch backup and a split backup may be prepared. In the case of batch backup, the data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of split backup, the data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of multiple timer interrupts for effect control.

The backup process for storing and storing the backup target data according to the backup condition is performed every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, when the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the effect control in step S9079. It may be feasible, or it may be feasible all at once when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. When it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the production control when the backup process is executed all at once at the time of power failure, for example, a backup showing log information including date and time information in a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122. Store the target data.

FIG. 22 shows a setting example of the backup control table 120T that provides a plurality of backup conditions and the like. The backup control table 120T is configured so that backup conditions, backup methods, division methods, number of storage area bits, multiplicity, and verification methods can be set for each backup target data indicating the contents of log information. When the backup method is a split backup, "automatic", "every 100 KB", or the like can be specified as the split method. The division method is a method or method for dividing the data to be backed up when executing the division backup, and it is sufficient that the number of divisions and the data capacity at the time of division can be specified. For example, when the division method is "automatic", the number of divisions according to the data capacity of the data to be backed up is determined each time the backup process is executed. Alternatively, it may be possible to determine a different number of divisions and a data capacity at the time of division according to the processing load on the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014. The number of storage area bits is a processing unit of storage data in the log area, which is a storage area for storing log information in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D provided on the backup memory board 9014, and in this example, 8 bits are shown. "8" or "3" indicating 3 bits can be specified. The multiplicity is the degree of mirroring in which backup target data indicating the same log information is stored in a distributed manner while overlapping in a plurality of different log areas. Whether or not the data is mirrored and stored, and the memory when mirroring is performed. The number of times can be specified. For example, when the multiplicity is "1", mirroring is not performed, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once. When the multiplicity is "2", mirroring is performed twice, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas for backup. When the multiplicity is "3", mirroring is performed three times, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored three times in different storage areas for backup. By increasing the multiplicity, redundancy (availability) can be improved and the reliability of stored data can be improved.

The verification method that can be set for each backup target data is a method of verifying whether or not the backup process, which is the storage process of the backup target data, has been performed correctly, and specifies whether or not to make a majority decision along with error detection. It is possible. When the verification method is error detection, when the data to be backed up is read from the log area, arbitrary error detection processing using parity, checksum, hash value, etc. is executed to verify the validity of the stored data. I hope I can. When the verification method is error detection and majority decision, in addition to error detection processing using parity, checksum, hash value, etc., in multiple log areas where backup target data that is multiplexed by mirroring and shows the same log information is stored. Compare the stored data. As a result of this comparison, if the stored contents match in a predetermined number of log areas among the plurality of log areas, it is sufficient to determine that the backup process has been performed correctly and to verify the validity of the stored data. For example, if the parity, checksum, or hash value calculated from the stored data in the plurality of log areas matches, it can be determined that the backup process has been performed correctly for each log area. If the parity, checksum or hash value calculated from the stored data in multiple log areas does not match, and if the number of log areas for which the same parity, checksum or hash value is calculated is the majority, those It should be judged that the backup process was performed correctly for the log area (judgment by majority vote). The "predetermined number of log areas" that is a condition for determining that the backup process has been performed correctly is not limited to the majority of the log areas, but is a preset fixed value (for example, "2") regardless of the multiplicity. It may be a variable value determined according to the multiplicity, the backup method, the division method, and the like. Instead of the judgment by majority vote, it may be determined that the backup processing has been performed correctly when the execution result of the error detection processing becomes normal for the first time.

The data to be backed up are system data, effect control error data, player history data, reception command data, set value change time data, power saving setting data, current time change data, power off time data, store name setting data, effect output amount. Includes data and production history data. The data to be backed up may include some of these data. The system data may include the effect control data stored in a predetermined area (such as an effect control data holding area) provided in the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133. The effect control error data is data indicating an error that occurred during the execution of the effect control. The player history data is data related to the player acquired by the pachinko gaming machine 901. The received command data is data indicating an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. The set value change time data is data indicating the date and time when the set value was changed. The set value change time data may include data indicating the date and time when the set value is confirmed, or the set value confirmation time data may be generated separately from the set value change time data. The power saving setting data is data related to power saving control that can be set by the staff of the amusement park. The power saving control is set, for example, when the power saving function setting screen is displayed on the image display device 905 by rotating the knob of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. It suffices if the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the function can be changed. Alternatively, when a test command for power saving setting is input, the power saving function setting screen may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the presence / absence of the power saving function and the function (power saving mode) may be changed. The current time change data is data indicating that the setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC has been changed. The setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC may be one or both of the setting of the RTC provided in the timer circuit 90135 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the setting of the RTC90201 provided in the backup memory board 9014. Just do it. The power off time data is data indicating the date and time when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. The store name setting data is data indicating the setting of the store name that can be set by the staff of the amusement park or the like. The effect output amount data is data indicating the setting of the output amount such as the volume and the amount of light emission that can be set by the player or the like. The effect history data is data showing the history of the effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, the number of rotations indicating the number of variable display executions counted from a specific timing, the number of type jackpots indicating the number of jackpots counted for each jackpot type, the number of consecutive chans indicating the number of jackpots that occurred without being controlled in the normal state, and the player Arbitrary information according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 901, the progress of control, etc. It suffices if the data indicating the above can be stored as backup target data.

The backup conditions that can be set for each backup target data may be any conditions that can occur as the game or effect progresses, such as settings, control, determination, and detection in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the effect control timer interrupt process execution step S9079, the effect control timer interrupt process is preset according to the processing result of the control device or processing device such as the CPU 90131 or VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. It may be determined whether or not any of the backup conditions is satisfied. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S9075, the effect device is set by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or by determining various detection results. When an error occurs related to the included electronic components, control is performed to notify the error. In this case, in the backup process during effect control, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is satisfied, and the effect control error data is created. In this way, when it is determined in the backup process during the effect control that the backup condition is satisfied, the control signal corresponding to the backup command for the backup during the effect control is transmitted to the backup memory board 9014. The backup command for backup during production control may include the backup target data. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 receives the backup command for backup during the effect control, the memory controller 90200 may execute the process of writing the log information including the backup target data by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC90201. By storing error information related to electronic components including the effect device, it becomes easy to identify defects and improve performance.

The backup process during the effect control is executed in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt process. Then, when the event occurrence condition according to the processing result by the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or VDP 90140 is satisfied, and the backup condition set for each backup target data related to a plurality of electronic parts including the effect device is satisfied. Is executed, a backup process for storing the data to be backed up is executed. In this way, when the event occurrence conditions related to a plurality of electronic components are satisfied, and when the event occurrence conditions corresponding to the processing results of the control device or processing device such as the CPU 90131 or VDP 90140 are satisfied, the log area or the like is stored. It is possible to execute a writing process for writing and storing information about a plurality of electronic components in the area.

The backup conditions that can be set for each data to be backed up may include write conditions that are different from the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. For example, in the player history data, the backup condition is satisfied when the data related to the player is updated, regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. For the received command data, the backup condition may be satisfied when the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, even if the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components does not occur. For the store name setting data, the backup condition is satisfied when the name of the store corresponding to the amusement park is set regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts has occurred. System data is stored regardless of whether backup conditions are met when updating data due to an event corresponding to multiple electronic components, or whether an event corresponding to multiple electronic components has occurred. Backup conditions may be met when updating data. As described above, even when the backup condition as the write condition different from the event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied, the backup process for storing the backup target data is executed. When a writing condition different from the occurrence condition is satisfied, a writing process for writing and storing game-related information different from the information related to a plurality of electronic components in a storage area such as a log area. Can be executed. When an event occurs according to a defect in an electronic component, backup data including game-related information is stored, so it is possible to easily identify the relationship between the progress of the game or production and the defect in the electronic component. The situation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be easily grasped.

When the data to be backed up is the effect control error data, the backup condition is not limited to the one in which the error occurs only, and the backup condition may be set including the time of error recovery. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S9075, the effect device is set by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or by determining various detection results. When an error occurs related to the included electronic components, control is performed to notify the error. In this case, in the backup process during effect control, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is satisfied, and the effect control error data is created. After that, when the error is no longer detected with respect to the electronic component targeted for the error notification, it is determined that the electronic component has recovered from the error. Even when the error is recovered by such a determination, it may be determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the effect control, and the effect control error recovery data may be created. The effect control error recovery data created in this way is included in the backup command for backup during effect control and transmitted to the backup memory board 9014 in the same manner as the effect control error data. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 receives the backup command for backup during the effect control, the memory controller 90200 may execute the process of writing the log information including the backup target data by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC90201. By making it possible to store the effect control error recovery data as backup data in addition to the effect control error data, it is possible to memorize the history of error occurrence and recovery related to the effect control and enable post-mortem verification. Pachinko game machine 901 The situation can be easily grasped.

In the information processing at power-on in step S9023 of the effect control main process, a backup recovery process for restoring the settings and control based on the log information stored in the log area may be executed. In the backup recovery process, verification may be performed by a verification method according to the data to be backed up, and it may be determined whether or not the stored data is normal. For example, when the verification method is a majority vote together with error detection, if the execution result of the error detection process is normal in a predetermined number of log areas among a plurality of log areas in which backup target data indicating the same log information is stored, Judge that the stored data is normal. In this way, if the stored data is normal, the data recovery process using the stored data in the log area is performed. On the other hand, when the stored data is not normal, the initial value is set using the initial data different from the stored data in the log area. The initial data may be, for example, data stored in one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, and used when the initialization process is executed in step S9021 of the game control main process. As a result, even if the backup target data cannot be stored correctly, the initial value can be set using the initial data according to the recovery from the power failure. Instead of the initial data, special data corresponding to the case where the stored data is not normal may be used. Unlike the initial data, the special data may be any data suitable for restoring settings and control. Whether to use the initial data or the special data may be different depending on the data to be backed up for which it is determined that the stored data is not normal. For example, if the data to be backed up is system data, data recovery using special data is performed when it is determined that the stored data is not normal. On the other hand, if the data to be backed up is the effect output amount data, data recovery using the initial data is performed when it is determined that the stored data is not normal. The setting of whether to use the initial data or special data is made in advance based on the update frequency and amount of update data of the data to be backed up, the importance of the data, the target parts, the target control, a combination of some or all of them, and the like. It suffices if it is decided. The backup recovery process may be executed when the data recovery conditions set in advance in the backup process during the effect control are satisfied. The data recovery condition may be satisfied, for example, when a power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received.

In the effect control during backup process, it may be determined whether or not the backup memory board 9014 is connected to the effect control board 9012. In this case, the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 may be determined. Whether or not to execute the storage process may be different depending on the determination result of the connection state, or the storage process having different contents may be executed. For example, when the backup memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012, the storage process of storing and storing the log information in the log area is not executed. As described above, in the range in which the preset limiting condition that the backup memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012 is satisfied, a limitation as a limit that the storage process is not executed may be provided. On the other hand, as long as the storage process can be executed as long as the restriction condition that the backup memory board 9014 is connected to the effect control board 9012 is not satisfied. As a storage process of different contents, when the backup memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012, a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122 is used as a log area to store and store backup data indicating various log information. The process may be executed. In this case, the data capacity to be stored as the backup target data may be reduced as compared with the case where the backup memory board 9014 is connected to the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control error data and the received command data are the backup target data, and the storage process for storing the log information is executed when the backup condition is satisfied, while the system data and the player history data are the backup target data. Instead, even if the backup condition is satisfied, the storage process for storing the log information may not be executed. As described above, in the range in which the preset restriction condition that the backup memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012 is satisfied, a limit is provided as a limit of reducing the data capacity to be stored by the storage process. You may. On the other hand, in the range where the restriction condition that the backup memory board 9014 is connected to the effect control board 9012 is not satisfied, the data capacity to be stored by the storage process is not reduced, and the backup corresponding to all the backup conditions is supported. The target data may be stored and stored. Not limited to the storage process, for any process or control in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a limit may be provided as a limit that a specific process or control is not executed within a range in which a preset restriction condition is satisfied. Alternatively, there may be a limit as a limit that the processing amount and the controlled amount are reduced as compared with the range in which the limiting condition is not satisfied.

23 and 24 show a specific example of displaying the maintenance history screen. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 901 is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step S905 of the game control main process, and when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting is set from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. A confirmation start command is sent. Upon receiving this setting confirmation start command, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 is shown in FIG. 23 (A), for example, when the maintenance mode process is executed in step S9078 of the effect control timer interrupt process. Display during setting confirmation. In the setting confirmation display, for example, the image display device 905 displays characters such as "setting confirmation is in progress". The display during setting confirmation includes a character display such as "press the push button to shift to maintenance mode" on the image display device 905. In this way, in the setting confirmation display, a display prompting an operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is performed. At this time, if the staff of the amusement park or the person in charge of the manufacturer detects the operation of pressing the push button 9031B, the image display device 905 displays the maintenance mode menu screen as shown in FIG. 23 (B). Move to maintenance mode. On the maintenance mode menu screen, the options of "maintenance history", "setting change / confirmation history", and "current time setting" are displayed, and the current time is displayed.

When the option 012IW106 of the "maintenance history" is selected on the maintenance mode menu screen, the image display device 905 switches to the display of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 23 (C). On the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be ranked higher. As an example, a VDP error indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the internal state of the VDP90140, an illegal winning error indicating that an illegal winning entry to a winning opening such as the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening has been detected, and a count switch Each log information of a switch abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of various switches such as 9023 was detected, a prize ball abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of a prize ball was detected, a magnet error indicating that an abnormal magnetism was detected, and a probability change failure were established. Log information indicating that the error was detected is displayed. When there are a plurality of pages of the maintenance history screen, the selection operation of the next page shifts to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 23 (D). In this case, the log information of the start of the setting change and the end of the setting change, the log information of the power cut date and time and the power on date and time, and the log information of the left-handed notification and the full tank notification are displayed. If there is a next page, the selection operation of the next page shifts to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 24 (E). At this time, log information indicating the start of setting confirmation and the end of setting confirmation, log information indicating that the current time was set during maintenance mode during setting confirmation, and log indicating that RAM clearing was executed by initialization processing. Information etc. are displayed. Further, when the selection operation of the next page is performed, the process shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 24 (F). Here, the log information of the RWM error error indicating that some RAM abnormality has occurred when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on, and the log information of the power interruption date and time and the power on date and time corresponding to the later date and time are displayed. .. Based on these log information, an RWM error occurred, so the staff at the game hall once stopped the power supply of the pachinko game machine 901, then turned on the power again while turning on the clear switch, and the initialization process was performed. It can be confirmed after the fact that the RAM has been cleared. Further, the log information of the CPU exception event indicating that the exception event has occurred in the CPU 90131, and the log information of the power failure date and time and the power-on date and time corresponding to the date and time after that are displayed. Based on these log information, a CPU exception event occurred, so the staff at the game hall stopped the power supply of the pachinko game machine 901, but when the power was turned on the next day, the CPU exception event no longer occurred. You can confirm that after the fact.

The third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 24 (E) shows the log information indicating that the current time has been set, which is earlier than the log information indicating that the setting confirmation has been started. Log information is displayed. For example, the setting confirmation was started at 09:36:28 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, while the current time was set at 09:36:36 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018: It is said to be 16. In this way, the date and time inconsistency occurs before and after the current time setting because when the current time is set, the date and time information after the setting is read out and the log information is recorded. In this example, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information is generated, and even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information is generated.

In addition to the display of the maintenance history screen, or instead of the display of the maintenance history screen, a two-dimensional barcode may be displayed on the image display device 905 so that log information can be acquired. For example, a two-dimensional barcode displayed on the image display device 905 is photographed by using an imaging device connected to the inspection device. By photographing such a two-dimensional barcode, log information can be provided to the inspection device. In addition, the log information may be output by any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of them. Arbitrary information output, not limited to log information, uses any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of them. All you need is.

The log information that can be displayed on the maintenance history screen may be all of the log information shown in the backup data, or may be a part of the log information shown in the backup data. For example, on the maintenance history screen, it is possible to display log information corresponding to an event occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as an exception event of the CPU 90131. Further, on the maintenance history screen, it is possible to display log information corresponding to an event occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the processing device, such as an error interrupt request of VDP90140. On the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of a specific event that can be established according to the processing result by the CPU 90131, such as the judgment when an error occurs in the backup process during production control, when the time is changed, or when the power is turned on again, can be displayed. Is. On the other hand, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events other than specific events, such as judgment at the time of updating the player history data in the backup process during production control, at the time of power saving setting, and at the time of name setting, is displayed. do not do. As described above, the log information stored as backup data may include log information that is not displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, log information that is not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen but can be displayed on the special maintenance history screen may be provided. The special maintenance screen may be displayed according to an arbitrary detection result, such as a detection result of an operation that is a predetermined operation for the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B. In this case, the operation procedure for the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is not notified to the staff of the game hall, and may be recognizable by the person in charge of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 901. It is not limited to the detection result, and it is sufficient if a special maintenance history screen can be displayed according to arbitrary control or processing. As described above, in the range of the specific type of log information among the plurality of types of log information, a limit may be provided as a limit that the maintenance history screen is not displayed. As long as it can be displayed on the maintenance history screen within the range of log information other than a specific type. Alternatively, a limitation may be set as a limit that the log information of a specific type among the plurality of types of log information can be displayed only on the special maintenance history screen and is not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen.

FIG. 25 shows a specific example when the setting change / confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode. When the setting confirmation display as shown in FIG. 25 (A) is being performed, the operation of pressing the push button 9031B by the staff of the game hall or the person in charge of the manufacturer is detected, and FIG. The maintenance mode menu screen as shown in is displayed. Then, the option 012IW107 of "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and operated. In this case, the image display device 905 switches to the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen as shown in FIG. 25 (C). On the setting change / confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether the setting is changed or confirmed, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other so that the latest log information is ranked higher. It is displayed in order. If the "current time setting" option is selected and operated while the maintenance mode menu screen is being displayed, the image display device 905 switches to the display of the current time setting screen. On the current time setting screen, the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second item is selected by tilting the stick controller 9031A left and right, and the number for each item is selected by tilting the stick controller 9031A back and forth. Will be done. When the staff of the game hall or the person in charge of the manufacturer presses the push button 9031B after the current time setting screen is displayed, the current date and time is set to the currently displayed date and time.

(Explanation of feature 41AK)
FIG. 26 shows an execution example of the backup process relating to the feature unit 41AK. In this case, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, thereby causing the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 and the occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM21 to 41AKM23. It has a function. Further, a writing flag 41AKF1 and a backup data buffer 41AKB1 are provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133. The backup data buffer 41AKB1 includes a plurality of buffer areas including the buffer areas 41AKB11 to 41AKB13. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210C of the backup memory board 9014 are provided with backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The backup storage unit 41AKA1 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13 as a log area. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23 as a log area. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33 as a log area.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM21 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 41AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exception event backup process in step S9042 of the CPU exception event occurrence process, and is data indicating log information including the exception event information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM22 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S9052 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Just do it. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process during the effect control in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt process, and is data indicating log information including the effect control error data. It should be. The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23 is temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 according to the creation order. For example, the first created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB11, the next created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB12, and the subsequently created backup data is written in the buffer area 41AKB13. Is stored.

When the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 has backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1, it reads and acquires the backup data. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 9014 and stored in the log area of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this execution example, the same backup data is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3, corresponding to the multiplicity of "3". For example, the backup data read from the backup data buffer 41AKAB1 buffer area 41AKAB11 and acquired is the backup storage area 41AKA11 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA21 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA31 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. It is memorized by copying and writing. At the start of writing backup data to the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3, the writing flag 41AKF1 is set to the ON state. At the end of writing the backup data, the writing flag 41AKF1 is cleared and the backup data is turned off. When the writing flag 41AKF1 is off, the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 permits writing of new backup data and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1. On the other hand, when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is not read.

For example, with respect to the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 and the writing to the log area is completed and the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB12. Can be read. The backup data read and acquired at this time is copied and written to the backup storage area 41AKA12 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area AKA22 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA32 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. It will be remembered. When the writing to the log area is completed and the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB13 can be read. The backup data read and acquired in this case is copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA13 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA23 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA33 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. It is remembered in.

The backup storage unit 41AKA1 is provided as a continuous storage area of 1, for example, by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 is provided as one continuous storage area by, for example, assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 is provided as one continuous storage area by, for example, assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33. Then, when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, writing is prohibited for new backup data. As a result, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components, if the backup data writing process corresponding to one of the conditions is being executed. , Do not execute the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied, if the backup data writing process corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is being executed, the writing flag 41AKF1 is on. Corresponding to, the backup data writing process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is not executed. Alternatively, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied and the backup data writing process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is being executed, the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned on. Correspondingly, the backup data writing process corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is not executed. Which writing process should be executed first may be determined according to the order in which the backup data is created. Similarly, when the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control are satisfied, or when the conditions for the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control and the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are satisfied, the write process is executed in the same manner. You just have to control it. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the limit of not executing the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition within the range in which the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is being executed. Is set as a limit. As long as the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, it is sufficient that the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

The order in which the backup data is created may be determined according to the processing priority of the effect control microcomputer 90120. For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied, the priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the priority of the VDP error interrupt processing, so that the occurrence event information creation processing unit The creation of the backup data by the 41AKM 21 may be executed before the creation of the backup data by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM22. When the occurrence conditions of VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and effect control error determination 41AKC3 are satisfied, the priority of the VDP error interrupt process is higher than the priority of the effect control timer interrupt process, so the occurrence event information is created. The creation of the backup data by the processing unit 41AKM22 may be executed before the creation of the backup data by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device such as an exception event of the CPU 90131. The condition for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device such as the error interrupt request of the VDP 90140. The occurrence condition of the effect control error determination 41AKC3 can be satisfied according to the processing result by the CPU 90131, such as the determination when an error occurs in the effect control backup process. Therefore, when the occurrence condition of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 or the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the occurrence condition of the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control is satisfied. become.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those conditions are satisfied, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those conditions are satisfied, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. When the occurrence conditions of the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which the occurrence conditions are satisfied, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. In these cases, writing is prohibited when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, so that if the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed, the writing corresponding to the next occurrence condition Do not execute the inclusion process. In this way, among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the range in which the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, a limit is set as a limit that the writing process corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As long as the write process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is not being executed, it is sufficient that the write process corresponding to the next occurrence condition can be executed.

When a plurality of generation conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the order in which the generation conditions are satisfied. For example, if another occurrence condition is satisfied during the execution of the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is satisfied first, the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is satisfied later may not be executed. Alternatively, when a plurality of generation conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the processing priority. For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied at the same time, the processing priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the processing priority of the VDP error interrupt processing. The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 may not be executed. Further, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the overwriting process may be executed according to the processing priority. For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied at the same time, the processing priority of the processing when the CPU exception event occurs is higher than the processing priority of the VDP error interrupt processing. The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed as an overwriting process that overwrites the stored data by the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2.

When a plurality of backup conditions are satisfied as a plurality of generation conditions, the order of creating backup data and whether or not to execute the write process may be determined according to the contents of the backup target data. For example, if the backup condition when an error occurs in which the backup target data is production control error data and the backup condition when a command is received in which the backup target data is received command data are satisfied at the same time, the backup condition when an error occurs. The write process corresponding to the above may be executed first, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of receiving the command may be executed later. Further, the write process corresponding to the backup condition when an error occurs may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the defect of the electronic component including the effect device is preferentially stored, the possibility of appropriately dealing with the defect of the electronic component is increased. Alternatively, the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of receiving the command may be executed first, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of error occurrence may be executed later. Further, the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of receiving the command may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of error occurrence may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the reception status of the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 is preferentially stored, the possibility of appropriately dealing with the control defect related to the game is increased.

(Explanation of feature 42AK)
FIG. 27 shows an execution example of the backup process relating to the feature unit 42AK. In this case, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132 to execute the memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 and the occurrence event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to 1. It has the function of 42AKM23. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210C of the backup memory board 9014 are provided with backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, and backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33. The backup storage unit 42AKA11 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA12 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA13 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA21 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA 211 to 42AKA213 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA22 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA23 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA31 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA32 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA33 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333 as a log area.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exception event backup process in step S9042 of the CPU exception event occurrence process, and is data indicating log information including the exception event information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S9052 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Just do it. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the error determination 42AKC3 during the effect control. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process during the effect control in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt process, and is data indicating log information including the effect control error data. It should be. The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to 42AKM23 can be stored in the log area of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3 in parallel with each other.

The memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 9014 and stored in the log area of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory writing processing unit 42AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 9014 and stored in the log area of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory writing processing unit 42AKM13 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 9014 and stored in the log area of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3.

Also in this execution example, the multiplicity corresponds to "3". The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM21 is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13 while being duplicated. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM22 is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23 while being duplicated. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKA23 is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33 while being duplicated. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA111 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA121 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA131 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. , It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA112 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA122 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA132 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The next backup data acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM21 is the backup storage area 42AKA113 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA123 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA133 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing.

In the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13 and the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage area 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 and the backup storage area 42AKA111 to 42AKA213, and the backup storage area 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 and the backup are backed up. Different addresses are assigned between the storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223, and different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas AKA131 to 42AKA133 and the backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233, so that they are provided as different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23 and the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage area 42AKA211-42AKA213 and the backup storage area 42AKA311-42AKA313, and the backup storage area 42AKA221-42AKA223 and the backup are backed up. Different addresses are assigned between the storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323, and different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas AKA231 to 42AKA233 and the backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333, so that they are provided as different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33 and the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage area 42AKA311-42AKA313 and the backup storage area 42AKA111 to 42AKA113, and the backup storage area 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 and the backup are backed up. Different addresses are assigned between the storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123, and different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas AKA331 to 42AKA333 and the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133, so that they are provided as different storage areas. By using physically different storage devices, different storage areas may be provided. The memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can execute backup data writing processing in parallel with each other. As a result, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components, the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is being executed, and the other It is possible to execute the backup data writing process corresponding to the conditions.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied, the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 is executing the backup data write process corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC1. Can execute the backup data writing process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 are satisfied, the memory write process is performed even while the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 is executing the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The unit 42AKM13 can execute the backup data writing process corresponding to the error determination 42AKC3 during the effect control. When the conditions for generating the effect control error determination 42AKC3 and the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied, the memory write process is performed even while the memory write processing unit 42AKM13 is executing the backup data write process corresponding to the effect control error determination 42AKC3. The unit 42AKM11 can execute the backup data writing process corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition can be executed even within the range in which the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is being executed. I hope I can. As long as the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, it is naturally sufficient that the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device such as an exception event of the CPU 90131. The condition for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device such as the error interrupt request of the VDP 90140. The occurrence condition of the effect control error determination 42AKC3 can be satisfied according to the processing result by the CPU 90131, such as the determination when an error occurs in the effect control backup process. Therefore, when the occurrence condition of the CPU internal error 42AKC1 or the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 is satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the occurrence condition of the error determination 42AKC3 during the effect control is satisfied. May become. For example, the creation order when creating backup data is determined according to the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 90120, so that the backup data writing processing by the memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 is also in the order of creation. It may be executed according to the priority.

FIG. 28 shows an execution example different from the case of FIG. 27 regarding the backup process relating to the feature unit 42AK. In this execution example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those conditions are satisfied, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. .. In this case, a writing flag 42AKF1 and a backup data buffer 42AKB1 are provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133. The backup data buffer 42AKB1 includes a plurality of buffer areas including a buffer area 42AKB11 to 42AKB13. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data in the order in which the CPU internal error 42AKC1 occurs. For example, when the CPU internal errors X1 to Xn occurrence conditions corresponding to n times are satisfied as the CPU internal error 42AKC1 a plurality of times, the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 performs backup data Y1 corresponding to each occurrence condition. ~ Yn is created and temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. For example, the first created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB11, the next created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB12, and the subsequently created backup data is written in the buffer area 42AKB13. Is stored. When the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 has backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 reads and acquires the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 9014 and stored in the log area of the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. At the start of writing backup data to the log area, the writing flag 42AKF1 is set to the ON state. At the end of writing the backup data, the writing flag 42AKF1 is cleared and the backup data is turned off. When the writing flag 42AKF1 is off, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 permits writing of new backup data and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. On the other hand, when the writing flag 42AKF1 is on, writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1 is not read.

Even when the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which the conditions for the occurrence are satisfied, and the writing process may be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. Even if the occurrence conditions of the error determination 42AKC3 during production control are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are satisfied, and the writing process may be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. .. In these cases, the writing is prohibited when the writing flag provided corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 is on, thereby corresponding to the previous occurrence condition. If the write process is being executed, the write process corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. In this way, among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the range in which the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, a limit is set as a limit that the writing process corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As long as the write process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is not being executed, it is sufficient that the write process corresponding to the next occurrence condition can be executed.

When a plurality of generation conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the order in which the generation conditions are satisfied. For example, if another occurrence condition is satisfied during the execution of the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is satisfied first, the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is satisfied later may not be executed. Alternatively, when a plurality of generation conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the processing priority. For example, among the exception events of the CPU 90131, an exception event having a high processing priority and an exception event having a low processing priority may be set in advance. Then, when the CPU internal error 42AKC1 occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times at the same time, the write process corresponding to the exception event having a high processing priority is executed, and the write process corresponding to the exception event having a low processing priority is executed. It may not be executed. Further, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the overwriting process may be executed according to the processing priority. For example, when the condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 is satisfied a plurality of times at the same time, the write process corresponding to the exception event having a high processing priority stores the stored data by the write process corresponding to the exception event having a low processing priority. It may be executed as an overwriting process for overwriting.

(Explanation of feature 43AK)
FIG. 29 shows an execution example of the backup process relating to the feature unit 43AK. In this case, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132 to execute the functions of the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and the occurrence event information creation processing. It has the functions of the units 43AKM21 and 43AKM22. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210C of the backup memory board 9014 are provided with the backup storage units 43AKA21 together with the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes a backup storage area 43AKA111 to 43AKA113 as a log area. The backup storage unit 43AKA12 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA13 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA131 to 43AKA133 as a log area. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 is a 3-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA211 to 43AKA213 as a log area. The 8-bit storage area is a storage area capable of performing write processing and read processing of stored data in 8-bit units. The 3-bit storage area is a storage area capable of executing a writing process and a reading process of stored data in units of 3 bits.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition of the storage area bit number of "8" and the multiplicity of "3" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 9014 and stored in the log area of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas, while being duplicated. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The next backup data acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition of the storage area bit number of "3" and the multiplicity of "1" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 9014 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. For the backup storage unit 43AKA21 which is a 3-bit storage area, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored in a smaller amount than the backup data storage area created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21. Stored in the area. Specifically, a 3-bit storage area is used, in which the number of storage area bits corresponds to "3" and the storage data is in 3-bit units, which is less than the 8-bit units of the 8-bit storage area. Further, the multiplicity corresponds to "1", and a single backup data is stored without being distributed without mirroring. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

In the backup control table 120T, when the backup target data is any of system data, effect control error data, player history data, received command data, and set value change time data, the number of storage area bits is "8", which is large. Severity is specified as "3". On the other hand, when any of the power saving setting data, the current time change data, the power off time data, the store name setting data, and the effect output amount data, the number of storage area bits is "3" and the multiplicity is "1". Is set to. For example, when the backup condition corresponding to the system data is satisfied for the backup target data, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is subjected to a plurality of backup data in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM11. It is written to the log area and stored. On the other hand, when the backup target data satisfies the backup condition corresponding to the power saving setting data, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is small in the backup storage unit 43AKA21 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM12. It is written to the log area and stored. In this way, when writing the first information corresponding to the first generation condition, the same backup data is stored in a plurality of log areas in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. On the other hand, when writing the second information corresponding to the second generation condition, the backup data is stored in a small log area in the backup storage unit 43AKA21.

For example, the occurrence condition at the time of power saving change, which is the backup condition for which the backup target data corresponds to the power saving setting data, is less frequently satisfied than the occurrence condition at the time of data update, which is the backup condition for the backup target data corresponding to the system data. As described above, the second occurrence condition may be satisfied less frequently than the first occurrence condition. Events that correspond to occurrence conditions that are frequently satisfied affect the memory of log information related to other events when log information cannot be stored properly, for example, when noise occurs during execution of write processing. Is likely to be given. An event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is infrequently satisfied is less likely to affect the memory of log information related to other events than an event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied. Therefore, when writing the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied, by storing the same backup data in a plurality of log areas, it is possible to prevent the trouble due to the abnormality of the stored data from spreading. On the other hand, when writing log information corresponding to an occurrence condition that is infrequently satisfied, it is possible to prevent an increase in the storage data capacity by storing backup data in a small log area.

The power saving setting data can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, a staff member of the game hall. As described above, the second information corresponding to the second generation condition may be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The data that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be reset by the administrator even if a problem occurs in the setting contents, and there is a possibility that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be disadvantaged. Low. On the other hand, for example, the data corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event that occurs according to the progress of the game or the production is impossible or difficult to reset, and there is a high possibility that the player will be disadvantaged or distrusted. Shows information about. Therefore, when writing log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions that cannot be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the same backup data is stored in a plurality of log areas so that verification is accurate when an abnormality occurs. The sex is enhanced. On the other hand, when writing log information corresponding to the generation conditions that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is possible to prevent an increase in the storage data capacity by storing the backup data in a small log area. The information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to the information shown in the power saving setting data, but the RTC information shown in the current time change data, the store name information shown in the store name setting data, and the information of the store name. Information on the volume and the amount of light shown in the effect output amount data, or a part or a combination of these may be used. In addition, when the projector is used as the effect device, the information of the display setting by the projector may be included in the information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The information on the display setting by the projector can be set by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 901, unlike the person in charge at the game hall. As described above, the manager of the pachinko game machine 901 may include a staff member of the game hall, or may include a person in charge of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 901. The information is not limited to the projector, and the information of the setting regarding the effect frequency using the specific effect device may be included in the information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas, may be provided with different backup storage areas depending on the type of log information shown in the backup data. For example, the backup storage area when the backup target data is the reception command data may be provided as a storage area different from the backup storage area when the backup target data is the effect control error data. A backup storage area corresponding to an exception event of the CPU 90131 or an error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 may be provided inside or outside the backup storage area corresponding to the effect control error data. In this way, when a backup storage area corresponding to the type of log information is provided in the 8-bit storage area, the memory write processing unit 43AKM11 determines the backup storage area according to the established backup conditions. The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 may be written and stored in the data.

(Explanation of feature 44AK)
FIG. 30 shows a configuration example of the feature unit 44AK. In this configuration example, the first effect control board 44AK12A and the second effect control board 44AK12B are provided. The first effect control board 44AK12A and the second effect control board 44AK12B may have the configurations and functions provided by the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 in the above embodiment. A first control unit 44AK10A, a first backup storage unit 44AK11A, and a connector 44AK13A are mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A. The second control unit 44AK10B, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, and the connector 44AK13B are mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13A of the first effect control board 44AK12A is connected to the connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B is connected to the connector 44AK11B of the first effect control board 44AK12A. The first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B may each have a part or all of the configurations and functions included in the effect control microcomputer 90120 in the above embodiment. For example, the first control unit 44AK10A has a configuration and a function related to the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120, and the second control unit 44AK10B has a configuration and a function related to the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may each have a part or all of the configurations and functions included in the backup memory board 9014 in the above embodiment. For example, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A has a configuration and a function related to the backup data memories 210A and 210B of the backup memory board 9014, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B has a configuration and a function related to the backup data memories 210C and 210D of the backup memory board 9014. It has a function.

In the first effect control board 44AK12A, when the first control unit 44AK10A has the configuration and functions related to the CPU 90131 in the above embodiment, for example, the effect of the serial communication circuit 90137 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the effect data memory board 9016. A process for controlling a first electronic component such as a data memory is executed. In this case, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores backup data indicating log information regarding the first control unit 44AK10A. In the second effect control board 44AK12B, when the second control unit 44AK10B has the configuration and functions related to the VDP 90140 in the above embodiment, for example, the sound processing circuit 90141, the lamp control circuit 90142, and the motor control circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120. A process for controlling a second electronic component such as 90143 and an image display device 905 is executed. In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B stores backup data indicating log information regarding the second control unit 44AK10B. As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can store the information about the first control unit 44AK10A, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can store the information about the second control unit 44AK10B.

When the first control unit 44AK10A has a configuration and a function related to the CPU 90131, the log information including the exception event information of the CPU 90131 is generated by executing the exception time backup process of step S9042 in the CPU exception event occurrence processing. It is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When the second control unit 44AK10B has a configuration and a function related to the VDP 90140, the log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 90140 is executed by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S9052 in the VDP error interrupt process. Is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this way, when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the exception time backup process in the CPU exception event occurrence time process is executed. On the other hand, when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, the VDP error allocation is different from the case where the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. The backup process at the time of error interruption in the merge process may be executed. In addition, when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, arbitrary storage processes different from each other are executed. You may.

Log information including exception event information of the CPU 90131 is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 90140 is stored as information different from the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Alternatively, in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, log information regarding an error generated by, for example, the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is stored. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, for example, log information regarding an error that has occurred in the image display device 905 is stored. In addition, the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may store log information related to arbitrary electronic components that are different from each other.

In the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the first control unit 44AK10A may be stored, and in addition to or instead of this, the first 2. Log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the control unit 44AK10B may be stored. In the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the second control unit 44AK10B may be stored, and in addition to or instead of this, the first control Log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the unit 44AK10A may be stored. When both log information is stored in both log areas, even if a storage error occurs in one log area, inspection such as analysis can be performed using the log information stored in the other log area. It becomes possible and the reliability of the stored data is improved. The configuration and function of the effect control microcomputer 90120 regarding the CPU 90131 and the configuration and function of the effect control microcomputer 90120 regarding the VDP 90140 are not limited to those divided into the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B. For example, the configuration and functions of the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 may be divided into a first control unit 44AK10A and a second control unit 44AK10B. In addition, the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B may be provided corresponding to a plurality of CPUs. The first control unit 44AK10A may have a configuration and a function related to a CPU, and the second control unit 44AK10B may have a configuration and a function related to light emission control.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B are different from the first effect control board 44AK12A on which the first control unit 44AK10A is mounted and the second effect control board 44AK12B on which the second control unit 44AK10B is mounted. For example, it may be mounted on the backup memory board 9014. In this case, the log information about the electronic component called the first control unit 44AK10A mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A and the log information about the electronic component called the second control unit 44AK10B mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B. Can be stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the second backup storage unit 44AK11B mounted on the common backup memory board 9014. As described above, the backup data indicating the log information regarding the plurality of electronic components provided on the plurality of control boards may be stored in the log area of the storage device provided on the common backup memory board. Alternatively, the first backup memory board on which the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is mounted and the second backup memory board on which the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is mounted are combined with the first effect control board 44AK12A or the second effect control board 44AK12B. It may be provided as a substrate different from the above.

For example, the storage data capacity of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is 1 MB (megabytes). On the other hand, the storage data capacity of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is 512 KB (kilobytes). As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as storage devices different from each other in that the storage data capacities are different. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is configured using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark). On the other hand, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is configured by using, for example, a SRAM with a battery. When a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) is used, the stored data can be erased by inputting a specific signal such as a clear signal. When a SRAM with a battery is used, the stored data can be erased by removing the battery, for example, in addition to inputting a specific signal. Alternatively, the storage data transmission method may be different between the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. For example, the storage data of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is transmitted by the serial communication method, and the storage data of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is transmitted by the parallel communication method. The combination of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B and the serial communication method and the parallel communication method can be arbitrarily changed. In this case, as the serial communication method, communication data corresponding to the serial communication standard whose communication speed is faster than the parallel communication method may be transmitted / received, or the serial communication standard whose communication speed is slower than the parallel communication method may be used. Corresponding communication data may be transmitted and received. Regardless of the serial communication standard, the transmission speed of the stored data may differ depending on the configuration of the data line (whether or not it is shared, etc.), the hardware configuration of the communication circuit, or a combination thereof. As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B are different in the method of realizing the backup function, the point that the forming material of the memory cell is different, the method of erasing the stored data, and the storage data. Both storage units may be configured as different storage devices in that the transmission method or the transmission speed of the stored data is different. In addition, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as storage devices in which the storage units are different from each other due to any difference. In the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, the storage data capacity, the method of realizing the backup function, the material forming the memory cell, the method of erasing the stored data, and other arbitrary device configurations and storage functions Of these, part or all of them may be configured as a common storage device. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can be freely combined in terms of configuration and function.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A can retain the stored contents without using a backup power supply, for example, when it is configured by using FRAM (registered trademark). In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can hold the stored contents by using the backup power supply, for example, when it is configured by using the SRAM with a battery. In such a configuration, the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be partially or wholly stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When a part of the log information is stored, the target log information is based on the update frequency, the amount of update data, the importance of the data, the target part, the target control, a combination of some or all of them, and the like. , It may be decided in advance. In a storage device that can retain the stored contents by using the backup power supply, the stored data is erased when the backup power supply is lost. Therefore, by storing the stored data of the storage device that can hold the stored contents using the backup power supply in the storage device that can hold the stored contents without using the backup power supply, the storage data can be surely lost. Can be prevented.

Whether to display on the maintenance history screen depending on whether the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. The setting may be different. For example, the log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can be displayed on the maintenance history screen, while the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. May be set not to be displayed. Even in this case, if the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is also stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, substantially all the log information can be stored. It can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is not a read target when the maintenance history screen is displayed, and therefore the log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. The handling is different from. Not limited to the display of the maintenance history screen, the setting of whether or not to read the log information when performing arbitrary output differs between the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. May be good. As described above, in the range of the log information stored in the log area of either the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, the limit is that the log information is not read when the output is performed. May be restricted. On the other hand, in the range of log information stored in the other log area, it may be a read target when outputting.

The configurations and functions of the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 in the above embodiment include the first effect control board 44AK12A provided with the first control unit 44AK10A and the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the second control unit 44AK10B, and the like. It is realized by a configuration divided into a second effect control board 44AK12B provided with a second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this case, for example, a separate developer shares the development of the configuration and functions included in the first effect control board 44AK12A and the development of the configurations and functions provided in the second effect control board 44AK12B, and proceeds in parallel. be able to. As a result, the burden of development work can be reduced and an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented.

(Explanation of feature 45AK)
FIG. 31 shows a setting example of an inspection designation command related to the feature unit 45AK. The inspection specification command is included in a plurality of test commands received when executing a backup inspection process, for example. FIG. 31A shows a setting example 45AK01 of an inspection designation command capable of specifying an inspection output unit and a communication method. The inspection output unit may specify a connector to be used as the inspection signal output unit by selecting from, for example, connectors 90152 to 156. The inspection output unit may be capable of inputting / outputting inspection signals and outputting read signals corresponding to backup data. The communication method may be parallel or serial, and in the case of serial, serial communication standards such as UART, SPI, and I2C may be selected and specified. As the inspection designation command in the setting example 45AK01, a plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 are prepared in advance. The plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 may differ from the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 and the designated contents of the communication method.

The connector 90152 is wired and connected to the effect control relay board 9017, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as a driver circuit mounted on the driver board 9019, an effect motor 9060, and an effect LED 9061. The connector 90153 is wired and connected to the lamp output board 9013, and can output a control signal for an electronic component such as a driver circuit mounted on the lamp output board 9013. The connector 90154 is connected to the backup memory board 9014 by wiring, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the RTC 90201 mounted on the backup memory board 9014, the serial communication circuit 90202, and the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D. The connector 90155 is wired and connected to the effect data memory board 9016, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as a plurality of effect data memories mounted on the effect data memory board 9016. In this way, the connectors 90152 to 90155 can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components. On the other hand, the connectors 90152 to 90155 are designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, so that the backup data reading signal indicating the log information read from the log area is read. It is possible to output a read signal according to the stored information. Since the connector 90156 is wired and connected to the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 901, no control signal for the electronic component is output. On the other hand, the connector 90156 can output a read signal according to the stored information, such as a read signal of backup data indicating the log information read from the log area. For example, the connector 90156 becomes an output terminal of a read signal according to the log information by being designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4.

The inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4, which can be designated by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, may include a part of the connectors 90152 to 156 or may include all of the connectors 90152 to 156. Further, the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 may include a connector common to each other, or may include a connector different from other inspection output units. For example, the connector 90152 for the effect relay wiring can input and output a plurality of types of control signals and detection signals according to the specifications of various circuits mounted on the effect control relay board 9017, the audio output board 9018, and the driver board 9019. It may be configured and included in the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. On the other hand, for example, the connector 90153 for frame lamp wiring is included in the inspection output unit 45AKC1 of the inspection designation command 45AKA1 which is configured to be able to input and output parallel signals and is designated as parallel as a communication method. On the other hand, the connector 90153 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA2 to 45AKA4 in which one of the serial communication standards is specified as the communication method. Further, for example, the backup wiring connector 90154 is configured to be able to input and output signals conforming to the SPI serial communication standard, and the inspection output unit 45AKC3 of the inspection designation command 45AKA3 in which the SPI serial communication standard is specified as the communication method. include. On the other hand, the connector 90154 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1, 45AKC2, and 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1, 45AKA2, and 45AKA4 in which parallel or UART or I2C serial signal standards are specified as the communication method. As described above, the connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include the connector 90152 capable of outputting signals by a plurality of signal methods and the connectors 90153 and 154 capable of outputting signals by a specific signal method. May include. Further, the connectors 90152 to 156 that can be designated as the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 output the connectors 90152 to 90155 that can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components and the control signals for the electronic components. It may include a connector 90156 which is not used. By designating the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 with the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, a signal output unit corresponding to a plurality of types of received information can be selected from a plurality of different signal output units such as connectors 90152 to 156. Then, it is possible to output inspection information according to the inspection signal, such as a backup data read signal.

The CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute various lottery processes related to the presence / absence of the effect and the effect mode, such as a lottery process for the advance notice effect. Based on the lottery result by such lottery processing, control signals corresponding to various control information are output. For example, when it is decided to execute a specific advance notice effect as a result of the lottery of the advance notice effect, the control signal for reading the pattern data of the advance notice effect control pattern corresponding to the advance notice effect is a connector for the effect data wiring. It is output from 90155 and transmitted to the effect data memory board 9016 via the effect data wiring. In this case, a control signal (voice signal) for controlling the sound output by the speakers 908L and 908R and a control signal for controlling the driving state of the effect motor 9060 according to the pattern data of the read advance notice effect control pattern. (Drive control signal) and the like are output from the effect relay wiring connector 90152 and transmitted to the effect control relay board 9017 via the effect relay wiring. Further, a control signal (illumination signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909 is output from the connector 90153 for the frame lamp wiring and transmitted to the lamp output board via the frame lamp wiring. On the other hand, the backup wiring connector 90154 can output control signals for electronic components such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D provided on the backup memory board 9014, and this control signal is a lottery result by lottery processing. It is not output based on. As described above, the connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include connectors 90152, 90153, 90155 capable of outputting control signals based on the lottery result, and connectors 90154 different from these. There is.

The connectors 90152, 90153, 90155 may be capable of outputting a control signal based on the lottery result and output a control signal not based on the lottery result. As an example, when a customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, control signals for controlling the demonstration effect without executing the lottery process are output from the connectors 90152, 153, 155 and the like. To. Of these, the effect relay wiring connector 90152 is a control signal (audio signal) for controlling the sound output by the speakers 908L and 908R and a control signal (drive control signal) for controlling the drive state of the effect motor 9060. It is possible to output a control signal according to the control information of the speakers 908L and 908R as the effect device, the effect motor 9060, and the effect LED 9061. The connector 90153 for frame lamp wiring can output a control signal corresponding to the control information of the game effect lamp 909 as an effect device, such as a control signal (illumination signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909. is there. On the other hand, the connector 90155 for the effect data wiring can output a control signal corresponding to the control information of the electronic component different from the effect device, such as the control signal for controlling the read process of the effect data memory. Further, the backup wiring connector 90154 can output a control signal corresponding to control information of an electronic component different from the effect device, such as a control signal for controlling the read process and the write process of the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D. Is. As described above, the connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components are the connectors 90152 and 90153 capable of outputting control signals according to the control information of the effect device, and the control signals for electronic components other than the effect device. Includes connectors 90154 and 90155 capable of outputting.

FIG. 31B shows a setting example 45AK02 of an inspection designation command capable of specifying inspection output data. The inspection output data can be specified by selecting a part or all of the data stored in the log areas of the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D provided on the backup memory board 9014 as backup data indicating the log information. It should be. The inspection output data is output from the connector designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 among the connectors 90152 to 156. As the inspection designation command in the setting example 45AK02, a plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 are prepared in advance. The inspection output data of the plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 are different.

The inspection designation command 45AKB1 designates system data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB2 designates the effect control error data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation 45 command AKB3 designates the player history data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB4 designates the received command data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB5 designates the change time data at the time of setting as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB6 designates the power saving setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB7 designates the current time setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB8 designates the power off time data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB9 designates the store name setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB10 designates the effect output amount data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB11 designates the effect history data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB12 designates all stored data as inspection output data.

The backup data that can be output by designating it as the inspection output data may indicate information related to a plurality of electronic components or may indicate game-related information related to the game. For example, when the effect control error data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB2, the backup data including the effect control error data can be output, and the error generated in the electronic component including the effect device can be specified. Backup data is output.

On the other hand, when the player history data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB3, the backup data including the player history data can be output, and whether an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts has occurred. Regardless of whether or not, the backup data at the time of updating the updated data about the player is output. When the received command data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB4, the backup data including the received command data can be output, regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. The backup data at the time of receiving the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 is output. When the store name setting data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB9, the backup data including the store name setting data can be output regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. Instead, the backup data when the name of the store corresponding to the amusement park is set is output. When the system data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB1, the backup data including the system data can be output. Backup data including system data is stored regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts has occurred and backup data at the time of data update due to an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts has occurred. Includes backup data when updating data. By outputting the backup data at the time of data update for the system data, the backup data when an event corresponding to multiple electronic parts occurs and regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to multiple electronic parts occurs. The backup data at the time of data update is output. In this way, it is possible to output information about electronic parts, game-related information about games, or general information that is not related to electronic parts or games, according to the specified contents of the inspection output data by the inspection designation command. .. It should be noted that the content is not limited to the content specified in the inspection output data by the inspection designation command, and information on electronic components and information on electronic components can be obtained according to an arbitrary detection result such as a detection result of an operation that is a predetermined operation for the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B. , Game-related information related to the game, or output information such as electronic parts and general information unrelated to the game may be switchable. Output information such as information related to electronic components, game-related information related to games, and general information unrelated to electronic components and games can be switched according to arbitrary control and processing, not limited to detection results. All you need is.

(About deformation and application)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 may not perform variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) the starting winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is opened from the closed state (second state) (second state). When the game ball that has changed to the first state) and entered the inside of the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) among a plurality of areas, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured to be.

In the above embodiment, the "ratio" and "probability" at which various decisions are made are 0% (never determined) or 100% (always), for example, 70:30. It may be set so that it does not become (determined), or at least the probability of one of the determination results is 0% (not determined) or 100% (always determined). It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, if the ratio of one of a plurality of decision results to be a decision result is higher than the ratio of other decision results, the ratio of one decision result is It may be included that it is 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of 1 as the determination result is 100%, the ratio of other determination results is 0%. Further, when the ratio of other decision results is 0%, if the ratio of 1 decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio of 1 decision result is the other decision result. It will be higher than the ratio.

In addition, various effects including the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the effect LED. The operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but scores are scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the game medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that grants.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as a variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result. A variable display device (a variable display device) that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (number of medals or credits) for one game and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each. One game ends when the display results of (for example, multiple reels, etc.) are derived and displayed, and prizes are awarded according to the display results (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, RB prize, etc.). Is a game machine that can generate. In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect movable mechanism provided on the front side of the slot machine and the software that performs a predetermined process cooperate with each other to perform the pachinko machine shown in the above embodiment. It may be configured to have all or a part of the features of the game machine 901.

Slot machines are not limited to those in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the game value, but only slot machines that set the number of bets using game balls as the game value and credits as the game value. It may be a fully credited slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when setting 3 as the number of bets, the number of bets using 15 game balls. Corresponds to the one that sets. The pachinko game machine 901 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types such as medals and game balls. It may be one that can be used in combination with a gaming value. For example, a slot machine can play a game by setting a bet number using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of medals, game balls, etc. are generated when a prize is generated. Any of the types of gaming value may be payable.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of directly executing using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(Explanation of Problem Solving Means and Effects of Feature 41AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 901, which can control a plurality of electronic parts, for example, a control means such as a production control microcomputer 90120, and power supply to the game machine is stopped. However, it is provided with storage means such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D that can retain the stored contents and can store information about a plurality of electronic parts, and the control means is a control means for events corresponding to the plurality of electronic parts. When the generation condition is satisfied, for example, a write process by the memory write processing unit 41AKAM10 can be executed as a write process for writing information to the storage means, and the storage means includes, for example, backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. A storage area such as the backup storage unit 41AKA1 in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written are provided as one continuous area. For example, when the first generation condition and the second generation condition are satisfied, such as write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the other Do not execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the condition. In this way, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other is not executed, so that the conflict of the process of writing the information is avoided. To. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The generation condition may be satisfied depending on the internal state of the control means, such as CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the generation condition corresponding to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing process of writing the information about the electronic component to the storage means is executed to store the information about the electronic component including the control means. be able to. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means such as CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, and the second occurrence condition depends on the control means such as the effect control error determination 41AKC3. It can be established according to the processing result. For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the writing process is executed with priority over the case where the second occurrence condition is satisfied. It may be possible. In this way, when the first generation condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing is prioritized over the case where the second generation condition that can be satisfied according to the processing result by the control means is satisfied. When the integration process is executed, the priority of the writing process is set while avoiding conflict in the writing process of the information about the electronic component. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied multiple times, the next condition is set according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition is being executed, for example, the writing flag 41AKF1. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the process of writing information is restricted according to such execution information, processing conflicts can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas such as backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this way, if the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas, the reliability of the information is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When a writing condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, the control means writes game-related information different from the information about a plurality of electronic components to the storage means, for example, a backup process according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. Etc. may be feasible. As described above, if the process of writing the game-related information corresponding to the writing condition different from the generation condition can be executed, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, an output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as connectors 90152 to 90155 and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means may be provided. Since such an output means can output a control signal and a read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

A first output means such as a connector 90152 to 90155 that can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components and a read signal that can output a read signal according to the storage information of the storage means unlike the first output means, for example, the connector 90156. A second output means such as the above may be provided. In this way, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals is prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature 42AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 901, which can control a plurality of electronic parts, for example, a control means such as a production control microcomputer 90120, and power supply to the game machine is stopped. However, it is provided with storage means such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, which can retain the stored contents and can store information about a plurality of electronic parts, and the control means is an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic parts. When the generation condition is satisfied, for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can be executed as a writing process for writing information to the storage means, and the storage means can execute, for example, the backup storage area 42AKA111 to 42AKA113. A storage area in which first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written, such as a backup storage unit 42AKA11 including the backup storage unit 42AKA11, a backup storage unit 42AKA21 including the backup storage area 42AKA211-42AKA213, and a backup storage unit 42AKA31 including the backup storage area 42AKA311-42AKA313 , The storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition is written is provided as a different area, and the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition such as the memory write processing by the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13, etc. When is satisfied, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition can be executed even during the execution of the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition. In this way, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other can be executed, so that the efficiency of the process of writing the information is improved. .. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The generation condition may be satisfied depending on the internal state of the control means, such as CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the generation condition corresponding to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing process of writing the information about the electronic component to the storage means is executed to store the information about the electronic component including the control means. be able to. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means such as CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, and the second occurrence condition depends on the control means such as the effect control error determination 41AKC3. It can be established according to the processing result. For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the writing process is executed with priority over the case where the second occurrence condition is satisfied. It may be possible. In this way, when the first generation condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing is prioritized over the case where the second generation condition that can be satisfied according to the processing result by the control means is satisfied. When the integration process is executed, the priority of the writing process is set while avoiding conflict in the writing process of the information about the electronic component. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied multiple times, the next condition is set according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition is being executed, for example, the writing flag 41AKF1. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the process of writing information is restricted according to such execution information, processing conflicts can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas such as backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this way, if the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas, the reliability of the information is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When a writing condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, the control means writes game-related information different from the information about a plurality of electronic components to the storage means, for example, a backup process according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. Etc. may be feasible. As described above, if the process of writing the game-related information corresponding to the writing condition different from the generation condition can be executed, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, an output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as connectors 90152 to 90155 and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means may be provided. Since such an output means can output a control signal and a read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

A first output means such as a connector 90152 to 90155 that can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components and a read signal that can output a read signal according to the storage information of the storage means unlike the first output means, for example, the connector 90156. A second output means such as the above may be provided. In this way, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals is prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 43AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 901, which can control a plurality of electronic parts, for example, a control means such as a production control microcomputer 90120, and power supply to the game machine is stopped. However, it is provided with storage means such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, which can retain the stored contents and can store information about a plurality of electronic parts, and the control means is provided when the writing condition is satisfied. As a writing process for writing information to the storage means, for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 can be executed, and when writing the first information corresponding to the first generation condition, for example, the backup storage unit. When the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas such as 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 and the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written, the information is stored in a storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. To memorize. In this way, by providing a case where the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas and a case where the information is stored in a storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas, various types of information corresponding to information on a plurality of electronic components are provided. Memory is done. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When the stored information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas among a plurality of storage areas that store the same information as the first information, recovery is performed based on the stored information, for example, recovery by information processing at power-on. The process may be executable. In this way, since the recovery process is executed when the stored information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas, the reliability of recovery based on the stored information is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When the stored information corresponding to the second information is determined to be abnormal, it may be possible to execute an initial process for setting the initial information, for example, setting an initial value by information processing at power-on. In this way, since the initial process for setting the initial information is executed, a problem when it is determined to be abnormal can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second generation condition may be satisfied less frequently than the first generation condition, for example, a backup condition when power saving is set. In this way, various memories are performed by providing the second generation condition that is less frequently satisfied. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second information may be setting information that can be set by the administrator of the game machine, such as power saving setting data. In this way, by storing the setting information that can be set by the administrator of the game machine, various storages are performed. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, connection wiring for connecting control means and storage means such as wiring connected to terminals TM03 and TM04 of connector 90154 and terminals TM13 and TM14 of connector 90220, and terminals TM01 and TM02 of connector 90154 and terminal TM11 of connector 90220, for example. , The wiring for confirming the connection between the control means and the storage means, such as the wiring connected to the TM12, may be provided. In this way, by providing the connection confirmation wiring that can confirm the connection state, the certainty of memory is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, an output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as connectors 90152 to 90155 and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means may be provided. Since such an output means can output a control signal and a read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, a first output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as connectors 90152 to 90155 and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means unlike the first output means such as the connector 90156 can be output. A second output means may be provided. In this way, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals is prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

(Explanation of Problem Solving Means and Effects of Feature 44AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 901, for example, a first control means capable of controlling a first electronic component such as a first control unit 44AK10A, and a second control unit 44AK10B or the like. , The second control means capable of controlling the second electronic component, the stored contents can be retained even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and the information regarding the first control means and the second control means can be stored, for example. It is provided with storage means such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, and can execute a writing process of writing information to the storage means when a writing condition is satisfied, and the storage means stores information about the first control means. Possible, for example, a first storage means such as the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and a second storage means such as the second backup storage unit 44AK11B which can store information about the second control means unlike the first storage means. And include. In this way, unlike the first storage means that can store information about the first control means, by providing the second storage means that can store the information about the second control means, various storages according to the control means are provided. Is done. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When writing the information about the first control means, for example, a CPU exception event occurrence process or a VDP error interrupt process may be executed as a process different from the case where the information about the second control means is written. By executing different processes in this way, various memories are performed according to the control means. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first storage means can store information about an event that occurs according to the first electronic component, such as log information including exception event information of the CPU 90131, and the second storage means stores, for example, VDP error interrupt information of the VDP 90140. Information about an event that occurs according to the second electronic component, such as log information including the log information, may be stored. In this way, by storing the information about the occurrence event corresponding to the different electronic component, various storage according to the electronic component is performed. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first control means can be installed as a substrate different from the first storage means, for example, on the first effect control board 9012A, and the second control means can be installed as a substrate different from the second storage means, for example, the second effect. It may be installed on a control board 9012B or the like. By installing the control means and the storage means on different substrates in this way, maintenance work becomes easy and a flexible device configuration becomes possible. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first storage means can hold the stored contents by using a backup power source, for example, when a SRAM with a battery is used, and the second storage means uses a backup power source, for example, when FRAM (registered trademark) is used. The stored contents can be retained without being used, and the second storage means may be able to store a part of the stored contents in the first storage means. In this way, a part of the stored contents in the first storage means is also stored in the second storage means, so that the certainty of the memory is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, the connection wiring for connecting the first control means and the second control means and the storage means, such as the wiring connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 90220, and the terminal TM01 of the connector 90154, for example. A connection confirmation wiring capable of confirming the connection state between the first control means and the second control means and the storage means, such as the wiring connected to the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the TM02 and the connector 90220, may be provided. In this way, by providing the connection confirmation wiring that can confirm the connection state, the certainty of memory is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, a display means such as an image display device 905 may be provided, and the storage information of the second storage means may be output by the display of the display means, for example, when displaying the maintenance history screen. By outputting the stored information by display in this way, it becomes easy to confirm the stored contents. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, a first output means capable of outputting a control signal for a first electronic component and a second electronic component such as a connector 90152 to 90155, and a first output means such as a connector 90156, which is different from the first output means, can be read according to the stored information of the storage means. A second output means capable of outputting a signal may be provided. In this way, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals is prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature 45AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 901, which can control electronic components, for example, a control means such as a microcomputer 90120 for effect control, and a connector capable of outputting a control signal, for example. An output means such as 90152 to 90155 is provided, and the output means can output a control signal corresponding to at least a part of control information based on a lottery result by the control means, for example, a first such as a connector 90152, 153, 155. The output means includes, for example, a connector 90154 and the like as a second output means different from the first output means. As described above, by providing the second output means different from the first output means capable of outputting the control signal based on the lottery result, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second output means outputs a control signal via a path different from that of the first output means in the same substrate as the first output means, for example, when a connector 90154 different from the connectors 90152, 153, and 155 is installed. It may be possible. In this way, since the control signal is output via different paths, the certainty of various signal outputs is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second output means may be capable of outputting a control signal according to the control information of the effect device, for example, when the connector 90152 is designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4. In this way, by outputting the control signal corresponding to the control information of the effect device, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second output means may be capable of outputting a control signal having a signal method different from that of the first output means, such as a communication method based on the output unit setting example 45AK01. By outputting control signals of different signal methods in this way, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

A mounting member such as a connector 90156 capable of mounting a connecting means to which the inspection device of the game machine is connected may be provided, and the mounting member may be soldered when the connecting means is not mounted. By performing such a soldering treatment, disconnection due to oxidation or corrosion is prevented when the material is not mounted. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The control means can execute, for example, a backup inspection process as an inspection process for outputting inspection information related to electronic components based on the received information, and responds to a plurality of types of received information such as inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4. Inspection information may be output by different output means. In this way, the inspection information is output by the output means according to the received information, so that the flexibility of information output is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The output means may be capable of outputting information on electronic components such as effect control error data and game-related information on games such as system data and received command data. In this way, by outputting the information about the electronic components and the game-related information about the game, various information is output. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

901 ... Pachinko game machine 9011 ... Main board 9012 ... Production control board 1904 ... Backup memory board 90120 ... Microcomputer for production control 90131 ... CPU
90140 ... VDP
90150 to 90156 ... Connector 90210A to 90210D ... Backup data memory

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to control any of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a first type of advantageous state and a second type of advantageous state in which the expected value of the obtained game value is lower than that of the first type of advantageous state. Advantageous state control means and
Variable winning means that can be changed to a state in which the game medium can be won in an advantageous state,
A notification effect means capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that the state is controlled to an advantageous state,
A specific effect means capable of executing the specific effect in a specific period after the end of the notification effect until the variable winning means changes to a state in which the game medium can be won.
The specific period is longer when controlled by the first type of advantageous state than when controlled by the second type of advantageous state.
The notification effect means
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in a mode in which it can be specified that the control is performed in the first type of advantageous state, the first notification effect for notifying that the control is performed in the first type of advantageous state is performed.
After suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in a mode in which it can be specified that the control is performed in the second type of advantageous state, the second notification effect for notifying that the control is performed in the second type of advantageous state is performed. Feasible and
The specific production means
A first specific effect that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect.
It is possible to execute the second specific effect, which is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the first type of advantageous state is controlled.
The execution period of the first specific effect is longer than that of the second specific effect.
further,
Control means that can control multiple electronic components,
It is provided with a storage means capable of retaining the stored contents even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped and storing information on the plurality of electronic components.
The control means can execute a writing process for writing the information to the storage means when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied.
The storage means is provided with a storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written as one continuous area.
When the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed during the execution of the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition.
A game machine characterized by that.